11.03.2015 Views

OpenCom 510 - This page is no longer valid

OpenCom 510 - This page is no longer valid

OpenCom 510 - This page is no longer valid

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

Create successful ePaper yourself

Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

Mounting and Comm<strong>is</strong>sioning<br />

User Guide


Welcome to DeTeWe<br />

Thank you for choosing th<strong>is</strong> DeTeWe<br />

product. Our product meets the<br />

strictest requirements with regard to<br />

quality and design.<br />

The following instructions will guide<br />

you in the operation of your<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> software and answer<br />

most of the questions that may<br />

ar<strong>is</strong>e.<br />

If you require further technical support<br />

or information about other De-<br />

TeWe products, please refer to our<br />

website at<br />

www.detewe.de.<br />

It provides additional <strong>no</strong>tes and tips<br />

on the product.<br />

We hope you enjoy using<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> 100 Product<br />

Family<br />

<strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> manual describe the communication<br />

system <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

For other members of the product<br />

family, the following manuals ex<strong>is</strong>t:<br />

■ <strong>OpenCom</strong> 100:<br />

Manual for <strong>OpenCom</strong> 105,<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> 107, <strong>OpenCom</strong> 110<br />

and <strong>OpenCom</strong> 120<br />

■ <strong>OpenCom</strong> 130/150:<br />

Manual for <strong>OpenCom</strong> 130 and<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> 150<br />

■ <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>:<br />

Manual for <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

(19" housing)<br />

We hope you enjoy using the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.


Contents<br />

Features 5<br />

Factory Settings 10<br />

Telephony Functions 10<br />

Author<strong>is</strong>ations 10<br />

Internet Functions 13<br />

Preliminary<br />

Information 15<br />

Construction of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> 15<br />

Scope of Delivery 16<br />

Declarations of Conformity 16<br />

Installation 17<br />

Notes on Safety 17<br />

General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 17<br />

Notes on the Mains Supply . . . . . . 17<br />

Notes on EMC and Earthing . . . . . 18<br />

Notes on Installing the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19<br />

Notes on Installing Terminals . . . . 19<br />

Siting, Ambient Conditions 20<br />

Installation in a 19" Rack 21<br />

Installing Modules 22<br />

Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22<br />

Notes on D<strong>is</strong>connecting the<br />

Mains Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23<br />

Installing the Central Control<br />

Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23<br />

Installing Interface Cards. . . . . . . . 25<br />

Installing a Power Supply Unit . . . 27<br />

Backplane 28<br />

Uninterruptible Power Supply 30<br />

Power Failure 31<br />

Interfaces and Connectible<br />

Terminals 33<br />

Overview 33<br />

S 0 Ports 34<br />

Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35<br />

External ISDN Ports (S 0 External) . 36<br />

Internal S 0 Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37<br />

U pn Ports 38<br />

Terminals Connected to U pn Ports 38<br />

Technical Information. . . . . . . . . . . 38<br />

DECT Base Station Connection<br />

Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39<br />

a/b Ports 40<br />

Terminals Connected to a/b Ports 40<br />

Technical Information. . . . . . . . . . . 42<br />

PCM Port 43<br />

LAN Port 43<br />

DSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43<br />

Service PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44<br />

COM Port 44<br />

Accessories and Adapters 46<br />

U pn Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46<br />

a/b Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46<br />

Audio Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46<br />

Approved Devices /<br />

Approved Accessories . . . . . . . 48<br />

Device Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . 49<br />

1


Modules 52<br />

Module Naming Conventions 53<br />

Overview of Available Modules 54<br />

MPS+1-AC 55<br />

MC+1-3 57<br />

MT+S2M1-1 60<br />

MX+S01-8 63<br />

MS+UPN1-8 65<br />

MS+UPN2-8 66<br />

MS+A1-8 68<br />

Configuration 70<br />

Brief Guide to Initial<br />

Configuration 71<br />

First Configuration via Serial Port . 71<br />

System Requirements 72<br />

Configuration under Windows 73<br />

Connection on Serial Port (V.24) . . 73<br />

Notes on Configuring the<br />

Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75<br />

Connection by Network Card<br />

(LAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75<br />

Testing the Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76<br />

Starting the Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . 77<br />

Configuration for Linux and<br />

MacOS 77<br />

Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77<br />

MacOS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78<br />

Configuring the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> 79<br />

Preparing the Configuration . . . . . 79<br />

Starting the Web Console. . . . . . . . 79<br />

Loading the Online Help . . . . . . . . . 81<br />

Fin<strong>is</strong>hing the Configuration . . . . . . 82<br />

Preconfiguration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82<br />

Remote Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .82<br />

Codes for IP Configuration . . . . . . . 83<br />

Saving and Loading the<br />

Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84<br />

Loading SW Updates . . . . . . . . . . . .84<br />

Resetting the System Data . . . . . . .84<br />

Generating Your Own MoH Files . .85<br />

Configuration Examples<br />

86<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> in Computer<br />

Networks 86<br />

Introduction to TCP/IP 87<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> in a Serverless<br />

LAN 88<br />

DNS Name Resolution . . . . . . . . . . .89<br />

Internet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89<br />

RAS Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> in a LAN<br />

with an IP-enabled Server 91<br />

DNS Name Resolution . . . . . . . . . . .91<br />

Internet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92<br />

RAS Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92<br />

LAN-to-LAN Link 94<br />

Useful Information on<br />

Internet Access 95<br />

Costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95<br />

Using the Web. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95<br />

E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96<br />

NAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96<br />

PBX Networking 98<br />

PBX Cascading 98<br />

Functionality of PBX Cascading . . .98<br />

Putting a Cascaded PBX into<br />

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99<br />

Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101<br />

2


PBX Networking 102<br />

Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102<br />

Types of Point-to-Point<br />

Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104<br />

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105<br />

Technical Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107<br />

Licensing Information 109<br />

Team Functions 110<br />

Introduction 110<br />

Explanation of Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . 110<br />

Team Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 112<br />

Examples of Use 112<br />

Executive/Secretary Team . . . . . . 112<br />

Three-member Team . . . . . . . . . . 113<br />

Unified Team . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114<br />

Toggle Team . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115<br />

Call Queue 117<br />

Introduction 117<br />

Activation of Queues . . . . . . . . . . 118<br />

Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118<br />

Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118<br />

Hunt Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118<br />

Examples of Use 119<br />

Attendant Terminal for an<br />

Operator with Two System<br />

Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119<br />

Group of Three Attendant<br />

Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120<br />

Multi-Company Variant<br />

122<br />

Configuring the Multi-Company<br />

Variant 123<br />

Activating the Multi-Company<br />

Variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123<br />

Configuring and Managing<br />

Companies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124<br />

Assigning Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124<br />

Assigning Trunk Groups . . . . . . . . 125<br />

Allocating Routing Codes . . . . . . 125<br />

Configuring the Company<br />

Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125<br />

Working with the Multi-Company<br />

Variant 126<br />

Company Telephone Book. . . . . . 126<br />

Making Calls Between<br />

Companies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127<br />

Billing Charges per Company . . . 127<br />

Configuring the PC<br />

Software 128<br />

Setting up TAPI 128<br />

Setting up NET CAPI 130<br />

Using the Systray D<strong>is</strong>play 131<br />

Browser for OpenCTI 132<br />

Synchron<strong>is</strong>ing the PC Clock 133<br />

Address Queries using LDAP 134<br />

USB DECT Box on the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> 135<br />

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . 135<br />

Installation and Configuration . . 135<br />

Technical Data for Operation on the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. . . . . . . . . . . . . 136<br />

3


Configuration Guide 137<br />

Overview 138<br />

PBX Ports 139<br />

Easy Access 140<br />

ISP Settings 141<br />

RAS Settings 142<br />

LAN-to-LAN Settings 143<br />

E-mail Function 144<br />

E-mail Access 145<br />

Frequently Asked<br />

Questions 146<br />

General/Hardware 146<br />

Telephony 147<br />

DECT 149<br />

LAN 150<br />

Internet 151<br />

Technical Data 153<br />

Index 155<br />

4


Features<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> a communications<br />

system for integrated voice and<br />

data communication. The most significant<br />

feature of th<strong>is</strong> communications<br />

system <strong>is</strong> its modular structure.<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> designed for installation<br />

in a 19" frame. The frame<br />

itself can be installed in a 19" wallmounted<br />

enclosure or in a 19" floorstanding<br />

cabinet.<br />

The system provides a number of<br />

slots for the installation of modules.<br />

In a fully configured system, the following<br />

modules will have been installed<br />

(and all slots will be occupied):<br />

2 power supply units,<br />

1 control module, 12 interface cards.<br />

By combining different interface<br />

cards, it <strong>is</strong> possible to create configurations<br />

suited to the user’s specific<br />

communications requirements. If,<br />

for example, a user requests DECTcapable<br />

U pn interfaces or additional<br />

S 0 or a/b interfaces, one or more interface<br />

cards can be integrated without<br />

having to exchange the entire<br />

system.<br />

Moreover, <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> systems<br />

can be cascaded, which allows you<br />

to integrate a higher number of<br />

modules, or networked in order to<br />

meet growing communications requirements.<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> can be integrated<br />

into system environments<br />

with structured cabling. All connections<br />

to a structured cabling patch<br />

panel can be made with standard<br />

patch cables.<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> supports the following<br />

communications applications:<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

Telephony with system telephones,<br />

ISDN telephones and<br />

analogue terminals, Internet/intranet<br />

data communication,<br />

CTI applications, sub-system operation<br />

and system configuration<br />

using a standard web<br />

browser<br />

Additional software packages<br />

for expanded telephony functions,<br />

e.g. the digital voicebox<br />

and voice portal systems Open-<br />

Voice and OpenAttendant<br />

The “Doorline” intercom system<br />

Telephony<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> communications<br />

system <strong>is</strong> designed to be connected<br />

to an ISDN basic access interface using<br />

the DSS1 protocol. Both multiterminal<br />

access (point-tomultipoint)<br />

and system access<br />

(point-to-point) configurations are<br />

supported. The system can be configured<br />

to run both types of access in<br />

parallel. S 0 and S 2M interface cards<br />

are available for connecting the sys-<br />

Features<br />

5


tem to the telecommunications network.<br />

An S 0 interface card provides<br />

eight S 0 ports (switchable to either<br />

internal or external connections).<br />

The S 2M interface card provides one<br />

ISDN S 2M interface for connecting<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> either to a primary<br />

multiplex interface or to a second<br />

PBX (ISDN point-to-point connection).<br />

For an overview of<br />

interface cards, refer to Modules<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 52.<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> firmware <strong>is</strong> designed<br />

for a maximum of 600 users.<br />

For information on system limitations,<br />

refer to Technical Data starting<br />

on <strong>page</strong> 153.<br />

The following can be connected to<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>:<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

Euro ISDN terminals<br />

DeTeWe system telephones<br />

OpenPhone 52 ISDN telephones<br />

(to the U pn port)<br />

DeTeWe RFP 21 base stations<br />

U pn ports are suitable for connecting<br />

the OpenPhone range of DeTeWe<br />

system telephones. Furthermore,<br />

the DECT-capable U pn ports of the<br />

MS+UPN2-8 interface card can be<br />

used to connect RFP 21 base stations.<br />

Analogue ports are suitable for connecting<br />

standard analogue terminals.<br />

If your network provider supports<br />

the CNIP (Calling Name Identification<br />

Presentation) feature, the<br />

names of callers will be d<strong>is</strong>played in<br />

addition to the numbers whenever<br />

external calls are received. The<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> supports the d<strong>is</strong>play<br />

of the name on system telephones.<br />

However, if you have created an entry<br />

in the telephone book under the<br />

number of the caller, th<strong>is</strong> entry will<br />

be d<strong>is</strong>played instead.<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> can be integrated<br />

into an ex<strong>is</strong>ting local area<br />

network (LAN) and used as an Internet<br />

access router and mail client by<br />

all workstations in the LAN.<br />

■<br />

■<br />

DECT handsets (with RFP 21 connected<br />

to DECT-capable U pn port<br />

of MS+UPN2-8 interface card)<br />

analogue terminals<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> can be configured<br />

and programmed by means of a web<br />

browser (web console). <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> browser<br />

needs to be installed on a PC which<br />

<strong>is</strong> connected to the system.<br />

S 0 interfaces must be operated with<br />

Euro ISDN terminals in accordance<br />

with the DSS1 protocol.<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> can be pre-configured<br />

at the service centre and remote-configured<br />

for service purposes.<br />

6 Features


A COM port can be used to connect a<br />

PC for the purpose of transferring<br />

connection data.<br />

You can use the “Doorline” intercom<br />

system to connect the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

to a building’s wiring system, which<br />

enables you to use door opener and<br />

doorbell functions through the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> enables you to<br />

use third-party CTI (Computer Telephony<br />

Integration) applications.<br />

<strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> requires the installation of a<br />

TAPI driver (provided on the system<br />

CD-ROM) on a Windows PC. The<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> also features the integrated<br />

dialling wizard OpenCTI 50<br />

with which users can call up and use<br />

telephone functions through their<br />

PCs without having to install a special<br />

TAPI driver.<br />

Further Telephony Features<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> can be used to<br />

run digital voicebox and voice portal<br />

systems. The configuration data and<br />

the recorded speech files (messages<br />

for, or left by, a caller) are stored on<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> CompactFlash<br />

card, which <strong>is</strong> installed on the<br />

MC+1-3 central control module.<br />

For further information, refer to the<br />

“OpenVoice” and “OpenAttendant”<br />

user guides.<br />

You can optimize telephone communication<br />

with the help of team functions<br />

and the call-queueing function.<br />

The “OpenCount” application, which<br />

requires a separate licence, can be<br />

used to record and save connection<br />

data; these data can be analysed using<br />

a number of individually configurable<br />

filter criteria. For further information,<br />

refer to the web console<br />

online help.<br />

You can connect two <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

systems (PBX cascading). Cascading<br />

<strong>is</strong> a simple way of increasing the<br />

number of terminals that can be<br />

connected.<br />

As your communication requirements<br />

grow, the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> can<br />

be networked with other telecommunications<br />

systems. The<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> can then operate as a<br />

sub-system or as a DECT server. It <strong>is</strong><br />

also possible to create a telecommunications<br />

system with several networked<br />

PBXs.<br />

Internet Access<br />

For the purpose of providing Internet<br />

access, PCs can be connected to<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> by means of the<br />

internal S 0 ports, and an entire LAN<br />

can be connected by means of the<br />

Ethernet port. If Internet access <strong>is</strong> already<br />

available from an Internet<br />

service provider, the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

can be configured accordingly. The<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> can also be used for IP<br />

configuration if there <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong> IP-capable<br />

client network. An integrated<br />

Features<br />

7


DHCP server and a DNS server will<br />

take over IP address admin<strong>is</strong>tration<br />

and name resolution for the client<br />

PCs.<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> enables all connected<br />

PCs to access the Internet<br />

using a common IP address; only the<br />

common address will be v<strong>is</strong>ible outside<br />

the LAN. Network address translation<br />

(NAT) <strong>is</strong> used to change the IP<br />

addresses of the local (client) PCs<br />

into the IP address of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> prevents direct<br />

access to the LAN’s client PCs and<br />

thus offers protection against attacks<br />

from the Internet. The<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> offers further protection<br />

of the LAN in the form of custom<strong>is</strong>able<br />

filter l<strong>is</strong>ts (firewall function).<br />

Note: Also observe the <strong>no</strong>tes in<br />

Useful Information on Internet Access<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 95.<br />

DECT Data Communication<br />

PCs that are <strong>no</strong>t connected to the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> via the internal S 0<br />

ports or the Ethernet interface can<br />

access the Internet if used in combination<br />

with a USB DECT Box or the<br />

OpenPhone 25 DECT terminals. PCs<br />

in these configurations can also<br />

make full use of the Internet and e-<br />

mail features of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

Data will then be transmitted via the<br />

internal data interface of the<br />

OpenPhone 25, which must be connected<br />

to the serial port of the PC by<br />

means of the supplied adapter. The<br />

Internet can be accessed directly via<br />

the remote data transfer (i.e. dialup)<br />

network. The OpenPhone 25 will<br />

establ<strong>is</strong>h a data connection with the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> via the DECT air interface.<br />

The Internet connection itself<br />

will be establ<strong>is</strong>hed either directly<br />

through an ISDN B-channel or indirectly<br />

through the internal RAS interface<br />

of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. Indirect<br />

RAS access <strong>is</strong> preferable as it<br />

uses the routing function of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> and thus benefits<br />

from the security features of shared<br />

Internet access.<br />

The optional USB DECT Box enables<br />

a PC to establ<strong>is</strong>h a wireless (DECT)<br />

ISDN data connection. The USB DECT<br />

Box and the PC are connected by<br />

means of the USB interface.<br />

For detailed information on installing<br />

the required driver software and<br />

on the various configuration options,<br />

refer to USB DECT Box on the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> starting on <strong>page</strong> 135<br />

and to the “OpenPhone 25” user<br />

guide. For information on configuring<br />

the OpenPhone 25 data interface,<br />

please refer to the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> online help.<br />

E-Mail<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> offers an integrated<br />

e-mail function that supports<br />

the POP3, APOP or IMAP4 protocols<br />

used to query an Internet service<br />

provider for incoming mail. The<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> can be configured to<br />

8 Features


enable every member of staff to<br />

query mail accounts. The<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> fetches the incoming<br />

e-mail headers (subjects) and senders<br />

from the mail server at set intervals<br />

and forwards them to the user’s<br />

system terminal.<br />

Further Network Features<br />

You can enable staff to dial into the<br />

LAN by means of RAS access.<br />

In addition, you can configure a LANto-LAN<br />

link via ISDN. Two<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> systems can thus connect<br />

their LANs for on-demand dialin<br />

(from both sides).<br />

A NET CAPI (driver software provided<br />

on the system CD-ROM) enables PCs<br />

without ISDN cards to use ISDN functions.<br />

Features<br />

9


Factory Settings<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> delivered with<br />

the following basic settings and activated<br />

features. We recommend that<br />

you configure the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> to<br />

meet your specific requirements before<br />

putting it into operation (see<br />

Configuration starting on <strong>page</strong> 70).<br />

Tip: Notes on the functions l<strong>is</strong>ted<br />

below can be found in the glossary<br />

(provided as a PDF file on the system<br />

CD-ROM).<br />

Telephony Functions<br />

■<br />

■<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> pre-configured<br />

for use in Germany.<br />

Analogue terminals: The dialling<br />

mode (pulse dialling or<br />

DTMF) <strong>is</strong> detected automatically.<br />

■<br />

■<br />

Incoming external calls are signalled<br />

at all corded terminals<br />

connected to the system.<br />

The system PIN, which <strong>is</strong> used<br />

for remote-programmable call<br />

forwarding, for example, <strong>is</strong><br />

“0000”.<br />

Author<strong>is</strong>ations<br />

Author<strong>is</strong>ations determine which<br />

functions can be used at the<br />

terminals connected to the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. Author<strong>is</strong>ations are<br />

configured for so-called user groups;<br />

users and their terminals are allocated<br />

to these groups.<br />

Two user groups are preset: “Admin<strong>is</strong>trators”<br />

and “Guests”. “Admin<strong>is</strong>trators”<br />

have access to all functions of<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> and unrestricted<br />

configuration rights. Users in the<br />

“Guests” group can<strong>no</strong>t configure the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> or make external<br />

calls, and have only restricted use of<br />

the terminal functions of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

Note: When the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong><br />

first put into operation, all connected<br />

terminals are in the “Admin<strong>is</strong>trators”<br />

10 Telephony Functions Factory Settings


group until a user logs on to the web<br />

console. All terminals are then automatically<br />

allocated to the “Guests”<br />

group. For further information on<br />

configuring user groups and users, refer<br />

to the online help chapter “User<br />

Manager”.<br />

The following terminal functions are<br />

preset for the “Admin<strong>is</strong>trators”<br />

group:<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

External line access: International<br />

numbers can be called<br />

from all configured telephones.<br />

External lines must be seized by<br />

entering a prefixed code.<br />

Least cost routing (LCR) <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t<br />

active. As soon as LCR <strong>is</strong> configured,<br />

users can make calls using<br />

selected call-by-call providers.<br />

VIP call <strong>is</strong> activated.<br />

An<strong>no</strong>uncements to system terminals<br />

are possible.<br />

Baby calls can be configured.<br />

If a call key <strong>is</strong> configured for a<br />

user on more than one terminal,<br />

he can program th<strong>is</strong> key for<br />

more than one outgoing call, i.e.<br />

he can use h<strong>is</strong> various terminals<br />

to make parallel calls from th<strong>is</strong><br />

telephone number.<br />

“Pickup” and “Pickup selective”<br />

of calls from other telephones<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

are activated. Pickup protection<br />

<strong>is</strong> deactivated.<br />

“Call removal” <strong>is</strong> deactivated.<br />

“Callback on busy” can be activated.<br />

If a user has configured more<br />

than one terminal under the<br />

same number, they can suppress<br />

the signalling of calls at the parallel<br />

terminals.<br />

“Call queue” <strong>is</strong> deactivated.<br />

“Reaction: Connection will be<br />

d<strong>is</strong>connected” <strong>is</strong> deactivated as<br />

callers trying to reach a terminal<br />

that can<strong>no</strong>t be reached or <strong>is</strong><br />

busy will hear a busy signal.<br />

Call forwarding to internal or external<br />

numbers can be activated.<br />

Call forwarding after a certain<br />

period of time <strong>is</strong> set to 20 seconds.<br />

Door calls can be forwarded.<br />

Forwarded calls are simultaneously<br />

signalled at the<br />

original terminal and at the forwarding<br />

destination. Call forwarding<br />

can be configured for<br />

specific MSN groups, provided<br />

that MSN groups have been configured.<br />

Users of the “Admin<strong>is</strong>trators”<br />

group can set call forwarding<br />

for other users, their<br />

own terminals, however, are<br />

protected against call forwarding<br />

configuration by others.<br />

Factory Settings<br />

Author<strong>is</strong>ations<br />

11


■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

External calls can be transferred<br />

to an external subscriber.<br />

Three-party conferences can be<br />

set up.<br />

During a consultation call, the<br />

waiting party hears music on<br />

hold, provided a music-on-hold<br />

file has been loaded into the system.<br />

Call protection, call-waiting protection<br />

and intercom protection<br />

are deactivated.<br />

The presentation of the user’s<br />

own phone number (MSN or system<br />

access number) on the d<strong>is</strong>play<br />

of the external party’s terminal<br />

<strong>is</strong> activated, but can be<br />

suppressed.<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

vated for the user groups. A special<br />

l<strong>is</strong>t with emergency telephone<br />

numbers <strong>is</strong> preset and<br />

activated.<br />

External and internal calls <strong>no</strong>t<br />

answered by a user are entered<br />

in their call l<strong>is</strong>t.<br />

The door opener can be operated<br />

from all terminals. Door<br />

calls can be forwarded.<br />

Keypad dialling <strong>is</strong> possible.<br />

The user group <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t author<strong>is</strong>ed<br />

to change the system’s time<br />

groups.<br />

Call forwarding for SMS calls in<br />

the fixed-lines network <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t activated.<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

The telephone lock can be activated.<br />

The terminal PIN <strong>is</strong><br />

“0000”.<br />

Interception of malicious callers<br />

<strong>is</strong> possible if th<strong>is</strong> feature has<br />

been ordered from the network<br />

operator.<br />

Speed dialling <strong>is</strong> possible, provided<br />

it has been configured in<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> central telephone<br />

book.<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

Connection data analys<strong>is</strong> <strong>is</strong> deactivated.<br />

The cost multiplier <strong>is</strong> set to<br />

100%, i.e. the costs are <strong>no</strong>t multiplied<br />

by any factor.<br />

Call charges can be recorded, associated<br />

with booking numbers<br />

and analysed.<br />

Every user can change the configuration<br />

of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

■<br />

The blackl<strong>is</strong>t, the whitel<strong>is</strong>t and a<br />

call filter are <strong>no</strong>t pre-configured<br />

and thus <strong>no</strong>t active. If these l<strong>is</strong>ts<br />

are configured, they can be acti-<br />

■<br />

Every user can create a personal<br />

telephone book and edit entries<br />

in the central telephone book.<br />

12 Author<strong>is</strong>ations Factory Settings


■<br />

■<br />

Every user can read out the<br />

charges.<br />

Every user can use the internal<br />

OpenCount application for the<br />

analys<strong>is</strong> of connection data.<br />

use OpenCTI 50 to make calls,<br />

manage calls and messages, dial<br />

numbers from both the central<br />

and personal telephone books,<br />

and use the OpenCTI 50 busy<br />

d<strong>is</strong>play.<br />

■<br />

Every user with a system terminal<br />

who has a workstation can<br />

■<br />

The multi-company variant <strong>is</strong><br />

<strong>no</strong>t activated.<br />

Internet Functions<br />

Note: E-mail, ISP and RAS access<br />

can<strong>no</strong>t be configured unless you have<br />

activated the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> IP package<br />

licence in the web console’s Configurator<br />

in the SYS Configuration:<br />

Licences menu (see also Information<br />

Regarding the Licensing of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> IP Package on<br />

<strong>page</strong> 14).<br />

■<br />

■<br />

RAS access (with or without callback)<br />

can be configured for<br />

every <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> user, provided<br />

that RAS access <strong>is</strong> author<strong>is</strong>ed.<br />

More than one mail account<br />

query can be configured for<br />

every user.<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> web console or<br />

from a system terminal that has<br />

been configured accordingly).<br />

The following IP addresses are preset<br />

for network configuration:<br />

■<br />

Host name: host<br />

■ IP address: 192.168.99.254<br />

■ Network mask: 255.255.255.0<br />

The following addresses are transmitted<br />

to the LAN’s client PCs using<br />

DHCP or PPP:<br />

■<br />

Gateway address:<br />

192.168.99.254<br />

■<br />

■<br />

Every user with a system terminal<br />

can be automatically <strong>no</strong>tified<br />

of the receipt of e-mail.<br />

Users can terminate Internet<br />

connections (through the<br />

■<br />

■<br />

Domain name: domain<br />

Domain name server:<br />

192.168.99.254<br />

Factory Settings<br />

Internet Functions<br />

13


■<br />

PPP addresses: 192.168.100.0 to<br />

192.168.100.10<br />

■ DHCP addresses: 192.168.99.129<br />

to 192.168.99.148<br />

You can change the IP settings in the<br />

Configurator. Consult the LAN’s network<br />

admin<strong>is</strong>trator if you w<strong>is</strong>h to do<br />

so.<br />

Information Regarding the<br />

Licensing of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

IP Package<br />

You will need to obtain an activation<br />

key in order to configure and use the<br />

IP package in your communications<br />

system.<br />

To generate the activation key, v<strong>is</strong>it<br />

the DeTeWe licence server (http://lizenz.detewe.de).<br />

The activation key <strong>is</strong> generated on<br />

the bas<strong>is</strong> of the serial number of<br />

your <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> and the transaction<br />

record (TAD). The licensing confirmation<br />

accompanying your IP<br />

package contains your personal TAD<br />

and all the information you need to<br />

carry out th<strong>is</strong> procedure.<br />

Write down or print out the generated<br />

activation key.<br />

Then activate the IP package on the<br />

web console in the Configurator in<br />

the SYS Configuration: Licences<br />

menu. Additional information can<br />

be found in the online help.<br />

14 Internet Functions Factory Settings


Preliminary Information<br />

Construction of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> designed to be<br />

used in 19" rack systems. It compr<strong>is</strong>es<br />

the following:<br />

■<br />

A 19" mounting frame for the<br />

modules. In a fully configured<br />

system, the following modules<br />

will have been installed (and all<br />

slots will be occupied): 2 power<br />

supply units, 1 control module,<br />

12 interface cards. The interface<br />

cards provide the system ports.<br />

The 19" frame of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> also referred to<br />

as the 1-12 frame (signifying the<br />

number of slots for interface<br />

cards).<br />

cards ordered by the customer must<br />

be installed separately.<br />

Please <strong>no</strong>te: Interface cards may<br />

be installed by qualified personnel<br />

only!<br />

For further information on installing<br />

modules/cards, please refer to Installation<br />

in a 19" Rack starting on<br />

<strong>page</strong> 21 and Installing Modules starting<br />

on <strong>page</strong> 22.<br />

■<br />

A backplane. The backplane provides<br />

the sockets for the control<br />

module and the interface cards;<br />

it supplies the modules/cards<br />

with the required power and<br />

system signals.<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> comes fully assembled.<br />

By contrast with other systems,<br />

you will <strong>no</strong>t need to assemble<br />

the frame and backplane yourself.<br />

A power supply unit and the central<br />

control module are built into the<br />

frame before delivery. Interface<br />

Preliminary Information Construction of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

15


Scope of Delivery<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> communications<br />

system’s scope of delivery compr<strong>is</strong>es<br />

the following:<br />

■<br />

1 19" frame (1-12 frame) with<br />

slots for 1 control module and<br />

up to 2 power supply units and<br />

12 interface cards<br />

The basic configuration of a 19"<br />

frame includes the following<br />

components:<br />

– 1 BPV+1-12 backplane<br />

–1 MPS+1-AC power supply<br />

unit<br />

– 1 mains cable for connection<br />

to the mains supply<br />

– 1 MC+1-3 control module<br />

– 1 CompactFlash Card; the<br />

firmware <strong>is</strong> stored on th<strong>is</strong> card.<br />

<strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> card <strong>is</strong> included in the scope<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

of delivery only if the 1-12 frame<br />

<strong>is</strong> the first frame ordered and<br />

<strong>no</strong>t being used to expand the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

All other components (e.g. second<br />

power supply unit, interface<br />

cards and accompanying cables)<br />

are included as per the customer’s<br />

order.<br />

1 RS-232 to RJ45 adapter cable<br />

(for the V.24 interfaces of the<br />

MC+1-3 control module)<br />

1 set of mounting brackets and<br />

screws for installing the frame in<br />

a 19" rack<br />

1 set of dummy covers for covering<br />

unused slots<br />

1 set of short user guides<br />

1CD<br />

Declarations of Conformity<br />

The communications systems of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> 100 product family comply<br />

with the requirements of EU directive<br />

99/5/EC.<br />

The declarations of conformity can<br />

be found on the Internet at<br />

http://www.detewe.de.<br />

16 Scope of Delivery Preliminary Information


Installation<br />

Notes on Safety<br />

The CE symbol on the product confirms<br />

that it meets the requirements<br />

of the technical guidelines on user<br />

safety and electromagnetic compatibility<br />

<strong>valid</strong> at the time of approval.<br />

General Instructions<br />

Please <strong>no</strong>te: <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> product may be<br />

installed and serviced by qualified<br />

personnel only. Opening the housing<br />

and carrying out unauthor<strong>is</strong>ed repairs<br />

may damage the product and<br />

will in<strong>valid</strong>ate the warranty.<br />

DANGER! Hazardous voltages<br />

inside the device!<br />

The MPS+1-AC power supply units<br />

may <strong>no</strong>t be opened as th<strong>is</strong> may lead<br />

to exposure to hazardous voltages!<br />

Defective power supply units must<br />

be sent to the manufacturer for repairs.<br />

Always use the original packaging<br />

when packing <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> components<br />

for transport or storage.<br />

CAUTION!<br />

Static charge can damage the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. Before and during<br />

work on the electrical components<br />

of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>, d<strong>is</strong>charge<br />

any static electricity from<br />

your body and the tools you are<br />

using.<br />

Notes on the Mains<br />

Supply<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> may be connected<br />

only to mains sockets with a<br />

protective earth conductor.<br />

Install the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> only near<br />

easily accessible, wall-mounted<br />

mains sockets.<br />

Always use a dedicated circuit with<br />

10-ampère protection to supply the<br />

19" frame (1-12 frame).<br />

If the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> being powered<br />

by two MPS+1-AC power supply<br />

units, each of the two units must<br />

be plugged into its own mains<br />

Installation<br />

Notes on Safety<br />

17


socket. Do <strong>no</strong>t use multiway mains<br />

strips to connect more than one<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> power supply unit or<br />

a <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> and other devices to<br />

the same mains supply.<br />

The mains cables of the MPS+1-AC<br />

power supply units must have ferrite<br />

rings fitted. The mains cables are<br />

factory-fitted with ferrite rings.<br />

The mains socket’s protective earth<br />

conductor and the telephone earth<br />

line must be connected to one reference<br />

point for potential equal<strong>is</strong>ation.<br />

<strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>rmally the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> housing.<br />

Earthing and Potential<br />

For the purpose of potential equal<strong>is</strong>ation,<br />

all conductive parts of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> must be connected to<br />

the protective earth conductor<br />

(earth busbar of the building’s wiring<br />

system) by means of a solid or<br />

stranded wire of at least 2,5 mm 2<br />

(yellow/green).<br />

Mains cable with ferrite ring<br />

Install an overvoltage protection device.<br />

Notes on EMC and<br />

Earthing<br />

Please <strong>no</strong>te: MOS modules:<br />

Observe the regulations regarding<br />

modules and packaging carrying the<br />

MOS trademark!<br />

Use earthing wr<strong>is</strong>t straps connected<br />

to the appropriate points on the<br />

frame (see C in the illustration<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>: 1-12 frame mounting<br />

points on <strong>page</strong> 21).<br />

18 Notes on Safety Installation


ø 2,5 mm2<br />

ø 2,5 mm2<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>: Earthing arrangement<br />

The metal screens of the subscriber<br />

and trunk cables must be connected<br />

to the circuit common in the d<strong>is</strong>tributor<br />

or the patch field. The protective<br />

earth conductor of the 230 V<br />

mains cables <strong>is</strong> connected to the circuit<br />

common and the telephone<br />

earth line.<br />

All metal parts of the communications<br />

system are mechanically and<br />

thus electrically coupled in order to<br />

provide protection through the protective<br />

earth conductor and the telephone<br />

earth line.<br />

Notes on Installing the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

Do <strong>no</strong>t allow any fluid to enter the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> as th<strong>is</strong> may cause<br />

electric shocks or short circuits.<br />

Do <strong>no</strong>t install the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> during<br />

a thunderstorm. Do <strong>no</strong>t connect<br />

or d<strong>is</strong>connect any cables during a<br />

thunderstorm.<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> designed for indoor<br />

use only. Route the cables in<br />

such a way that they can<strong>no</strong>t be<br />

stepped on or tripped over.<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> must be securely<br />

screwed into the frame when installation<br />

work on the system <strong>is</strong> interrupted<br />

or terminated. Unused slots<br />

must be covered with dummy covers<br />

(included in the scope of delivery).<br />

Notes on Installing<br />

Terminals<br />

Only devices that supply safety extra-low<br />

voltage (SELV) may be connected<br />

to the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. Proper<br />

use of standard terminals will sat<strong>is</strong>fy<br />

th<strong>is</strong> requirement.<br />

The analogue interfaces may only be<br />

used to connect terminals that meet<br />

Installation<br />

Notes on Safety<br />

19


the appropriate technical requirements.<br />

For details, refer to a/b Ports<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 40.<br />

Use a shielded Ethernet cable (STP<br />

cable, Shielded Tw<strong>is</strong>ted Pair cable) to<br />

connect the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> to a Local<br />

Area Network (LAN).<br />

Siting, Ambient Conditions<br />

The ambient temperature for operating<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> must be between<br />

+5 °C and +40 °C.<br />

To maintain a safe ambient temperature,<br />

install the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> in a<br />

properly ventilated location, away<br />

from sources of direct heat.<br />

that the air intake temperature does<br />

<strong>no</strong>t exceed +40 °C.<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> may also be connected<br />

to an IT system.<br />

Do <strong>no</strong>t site the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

in front of or above heat sources<br />

such as radiators,<br />

in direct sunlight,<br />

behind curtains,<br />

in small, unventilated, damp<br />

rooms,<br />

near flammable materials,<br />

or near high-frequency devices<br />

such as transmitter and radiotherapy<br />

or similar apparatus.<br />

If the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> to be installed<br />

together with other electronic<br />

equipment in a 19” cabinet, ensure<br />

20 Siting, Ambient Conditions Installation


Installation in a 19" Rack<br />

1<br />

2<br />

C<br />

C<br />

B<br />

A<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>: 1-12 frame mounting points<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> designed to be<br />

installed in 19" racks only.<br />

The following mounting points for<br />

installation in a 19" rack can be<br />

found on the 1-12 frame:<br />

Legend<br />

1 Left mounting bracket<br />

2 Right mounting bracket<br />

Legend<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

Mounting bracket screw bolts for<br />

front mounting (approx. 132 mm)<br />

to the uprights of the 19" rack<br />

Mounting bracket screw bolts for<br />

mid-mounting (approx. 400 mm)<br />

to the uprights of the 19" rack<br />

Left and right screw points for<br />

earthing wr<strong>is</strong>t strap or circuit<br />

common connection between<br />

1-12 frame and 19" rack<br />

Installation<br />

Note: If the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> to be<br />

used as a wall-mounted instead of a<br />

floor-standing system, it must be installed<br />

in a standard-type wallmounted<br />

enclosure using 19" mounting<br />

tech<strong>no</strong>logy.<br />

Installation in a 19" Rack<br />

21


Installing Modules<br />

A<br />

0 B<br />

C (1-6)<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>: 1-12 frame slots<br />

D (7-12)<br />

Slots<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> 1-12 frame can<br />

house up to:<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

2power supply units<br />

1 control module<br />

12 interface cards (trunk or subscriber<br />

modules) split into<br />

2 separate groups.<br />

The following slots are provided for<br />

installing these modules:<br />

Legend<br />

A<br />

B<br />

Slot for group 1 power supply unit<br />

Slot for group 2 power supply unit<br />

0 Slot for central control module<br />

C<br />

D<br />

Slots for group 1 interface cards<br />

(slots 1 - 6)<br />

Slots for group 2 interface cards<br />

(slots 7 - 12)<br />

Each of the two groups (1 or 2, or C<br />

and D, respectively, in the illustration)<br />

requires its own power supply<br />

unit. Power for the control module <strong>is</strong><br />

always supplied by the group 1<br />

power supply unit. The group 1<br />

22 Installing Modules Installation


power supply unit must therefore always<br />

be installed.<br />

Modules can be installed either<br />

when the entire system <strong>is</strong> configured<br />

or as an upgrade at a later time.<br />

Notes on D<strong>is</strong>connecting<br />

the Mains Supply<br />

DANGER! Hazardous voltages<br />

inside the device!<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> must be d<strong>is</strong>connected<br />

from the mains supply for<br />

the following installation work:<br />

■<br />

■<br />

Installation of the central control<br />

module<br />

Installation of a power supply<br />

unit<br />

If a 1-12 frame <strong>is</strong> being powered by<br />

two power supply units, it <strong>is</strong> de-energ<strong>is</strong>ed<br />

by unplugging both mains<br />

cables.<br />

DANGER! Always unplug the<br />

mains cables of both power supply<br />

units when installing the central<br />

control module or a power<br />

supply unit.<br />

If you unplug the mains cable of the<br />

group 2 (B) power supply unit, the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> will still be operational!<br />

However, only the modules<br />

supplied by the group 1 (A) power<br />

supply unit, i.e. the central control<br />

module and the interface cards in<br />

slots 1 - 6, will be functional.<br />

If you unplug the mains cable of the<br />

group 1 (A) power supply unit, the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> ceases to be operational.<br />

However, slots 7 - 12 (D) will<br />

still be supplied with operating voltage.<br />

(Refer to the illustration<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>: 1-12 frame slots on<br />

<strong>page</strong> 22 to determine the location of<br />

the modules specified in parentheses<br />

above.)<br />

The LEDs of each module indicate<br />

whether the respective module <strong>is</strong><br />

operational. For further information<br />

on LED indicators, refer to Modules<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 52.<br />

Installing the Central<br />

Control Module<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> comes with the<br />

central control module installed.<br />

Should you need to exchange the<br />

central control module, proceed as<br />

follows:<br />

1. Shut down the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. To<br />

do so, first restart the system by<br />

– entering the code procedure<br />

H*185 (system<br />

PIN) # on a connected telephone,<br />

or<br />

Installation<br />

Installing Modules<br />

23


– clicking on Restart in the<br />

SYS Configuration: Restart<br />

menu in the Configurator.<br />

2. Wait until the LEDs of the installed<br />

modules start flashing<br />

red.<br />

DANGER! Hazardous voltages<br />

inside the device!<br />

3. Unplug all of the mains cables of<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> to d<strong>is</strong>connect<br />

the system from the mains supply.<br />

The central control module must<br />

<strong>no</strong>t be installed if the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> switched on!<br />

Refer to Notes on D<strong>is</strong>connecting<br />

the Mains Supply starting on<br />

<strong>page</strong> 23.<br />

4. Remove the screws with which<br />

the central control module <strong>is</strong> secured<br />

in the 1-12 frame and pull<br />

the module out.<br />

5. Unpack the central control module.<br />

CAUTION!<br />

Static charge can damage electronic<br />

devices. Observe the regulations<br />

regarding electrostatically<br />

sensitive components.<br />

6. Carefully push the central control<br />

module into slot 0 (see also<br />

the illustration <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>: 1-<br />

12 frame slots on <strong>page</strong> 22). The<br />

printing on the front of the module<br />

should be at the top.<br />

Ensure that the backplane plug<br />

of the central control module <strong>is</strong><br />

securely plugged into the socket<br />

on the backplane.<br />

7. Refit the screws to secure the<br />

module in the 1-12 frame.<br />

8. Plug the desired cables into the<br />

corresponding RJ45 sockets on<br />

the central control module. Refer<br />

to Modules starting on<br />

<strong>page</strong> 52 for information on pin<br />

assignment.<br />

9. Switch the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> on<br />

again. To do so, reconnect the<br />

group 1 power supply unit (see<br />

A in the illustration<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>: 1-12 frame slots<br />

on <strong>page</strong> 22) with the mains supply<br />

(if you are powering the<br />

24 Installing Modules Installation


<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> with two power<br />

supply units, reconnect the second<br />

unit as well).<br />

The system will <strong>no</strong>w start up and<br />

all modules (interface cards) will<br />

be re-initial<strong>is</strong>ed.<br />

10. Observe the module LEDs during<br />

start-up of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

Information on indicators can be<br />

found in Modules starting on<br />

<strong>page</strong> 52.<br />

Note: The MAC address for the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> assigned by the central<br />

control module and can<strong>no</strong>t be<br />

changed. If the central control module<br />

has to be exchanged, you may<br />

need to change the IP settings. For<br />

further information on MAC addresses,<br />

refer to the online help.<br />

Explanatory Note on Shutting<br />

Down the System<br />

If the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> d<strong>is</strong>connected<br />

from the mains supply, its main<br />

memory <strong>is</strong> deleted. The main memory<br />

stores the current configuration<br />

data, which are regularly copied to<br />

the CompactFlash memory card. Restarting<br />

the system causes it to copy<br />

the current configuration data from<br />

the main memory to the Compact-<br />

Flash card, which ensures that the<br />

most recent configuration <strong>is</strong> restored<br />

when the system <strong>is</strong> started up.<br />

Installing Interface Cards<br />

Interface cards can be installed or<br />

exchanged with the system powered<br />

up (“hot-plugging”). Proceed as follows:<br />

1. If you want to exchange an interface<br />

card, the slot for th<strong>is</strong> card<br />

needs to be deactivated first.<br />

Open the PBX Configuration:<br />

Ports: Slots <strong>page</strong> in the Configurator.<br />

In the table row l<strong>is</strong>ting<br />

the card to be exchanged, click<br />

on Stop. The system then deactivates<br />

the slot. Any connections<br />

(telephone calls, data transfers)<br />

establ<strong>is</strong>hed through th<strong>is</strong> card<br />

will be terminated.<br />

2. Remove the screws with which<br />

the interface card <strong>is</strong> secured in<br />

the 1-12 frame and pull the card<br />

out.<br />

3. Unpack the interface card and<br />

check whether it <strong>is</strong> the desired<br />

type. The type designation <strong>is</strong><br />

printed on the front of the card.<br />

Installation<br />

Installing Modules<br />

25


MX+S01-8<br />

S0 1<br />

S0 2<br />

Detail: Printing on the front of an<br />

“MX+S01-8” type interface card<br />

CAUTION!<br />

Static charge can damage electronic<br />

devices. Observe the regulations<br />

regarding electrostatically<br />

sensitive components.<br />

4. Carefully push the interface card<br />

into the corresponding slot. The<br />

printing on the front of the module<br />

should be at the top (see illustration<br />

in previous instruction).<br />

Ensure that the backplane plug<br />

of the interface card <strong>is</strong> securely<br />

plugged into the socket on the<br />

backplane.<br />

5. Refit the screws to secure the interface<br />

card in the 1-12 frame.<br />

6. Plug the desired cables into the<br />

corresponding RJ45 sockets on<br />

the interface card. Refer to Modules<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 52 for information<br />

on the pin assignment<br />

for each interface card.<br />

7. Cover any unused slots with<br />

dummy covers (included in the<br />

scope of delivery).<br />

The dummy covers must be securely<br />

screwed to the frame!<br />

8. If you have exchanged the interface<br />

card, you will need to reactivate<br />

the slot for th<strong>is</strong> card.<br />

Open the PBX Configuration:<br />

Ports: Slots <strong>page</strong> in the Configurator<br />

again. In the table row<br />

l<strong>is</strong>ting the card that has been exchanged,<br />

click on Start.<br />

9. Observe the LEDs on the card.<br />

Information on indicators can be<br />

found in the chapter Modules<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 52.<br />

Checking the Status of the<br />

Interface Cards via the Web<br />

Console<br />

You can also check the status of the<br />

interface cards via the Web console<br />

of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

1. Open the PBX Configuration:<br />

Ports: Slots <strong>page</strong> in the Configurator.<br />

26 Installing Modules Installation


2. In the Status table row, check<br />

whether a green tick <strong>is</strong> d<strong>is</strong>played<br />

for the newly installed interface<br />

card. The tick indicates that the<br />

interface card <strong>is</strong> operational.<br />

Installing a Power Supply<br />

Unit<br />

Depending on the number of installed<br />

modules (interface cards), either<br />

one or two power supplies are<br />

required (see A and B in the illustration<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>: 1-12 frame slots<br />

on <strong>page</strong> 22):<br />

■<br />

■<br />

The power supply unit for<br />

group 1 (A) must always be installed.<br />

It supplies the central<br />

control module and the interface<br />

cards in slots 1 - 6.<br />

The power supply unit for<br />

group 2 (B) <strong>is</strong> required if interface<br />

cards are to be installed in<br />

in slots 7 - 12.<br />

If you want to deinstall the second<br />

power supply unit or exchange a defective<br />

one, proceed as follows:<br />

– clicking on Restart in the<br />

SYS Configuration: Restart<br />

menu in the Configurator.<br />

2. Wait until the LEDs of the installed<br />

modules start flashing<br />

red.<br />

DANGER! Hazardous voltages<br />

inside the device!<br />

3. Unplug all of the mains cables of<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> to d<strong>is</strong>connect<br />

the system from the mains supply.<br />

Power supply units must <strong>no</strong>t be<br />

installed if the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong><br />

switched on! Refer to Notes on<br />

D<strong>is</strong>connecting the Mains Supply<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 23.<br />

4. Unpack the power supply unit.<br />

CAUTION!<br />

1. Shut down the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. To<br />

do so, first restart the system by<br />

– entering the code procedure<br />

H*185 (system<br />

PIN) # on a connected telephone,<br />

or<br />

Static charge can damage electronic<br />

devices. Observe the regulations<br />

regarding electrostatically<br />

sensitive components.<br />

Installation<br />

Installing Modules<br />

27


5. Carefully push the power supply<br />

unit into the corresponding slot<br />

(see also the illustration<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>: 1-12 frame slots<br />

on <strong>page</strong> 22). Seen from the<br />

front, the mains inlet socket<br />

should be on the bottom right.<br />

Ensure that the backplane plug<br />

of the power supply unit <strong>is</strong> securely<br />

plugged into the socket<br />

on the backplane.<br />

6. Refit the screws to secure the<br />

power supply in the 1-12 frame.<br />

7. Install further interface cards if<br />

required (see also Installing Interface<br />

Cards starting on<br />

<strong>page</strong> 25).<br />

8. Switch the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> on. To<br />

do so, reconnect the power supply<br />

unit with the mains supply (if<br />

you are powering the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> with two power<br />

supply units, connect the second<br />

unit as well).<br />

The system will <strong>no</strong>w start up and<br />

all modules (interface cards) will<br />

be re-initial<strong>is</strong>ed.<br />

9. Observe the module LEDs during<br />

start-up of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

Information on indicators can be<br />

found in the chapter Modules<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 52.<br />

Backplane<br />

The BPV+1-12 backplane of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> supplies the modules<br />

installed in the 1-12 frame with the<br />

required power and system signals.<br />

The backplane <strong>is</strong> also used to provide<br />

access to the PCM highway (for<br />

transmitting utility data), the LAN<br />

(for exchanging signalling data) and<br />

to the system clock circuits.<br />

■<br />

■<br />

The MPS+1-AC power supply<br />

units and the MC+1-3 central<br />

control module are each connected<br />

by means of a 96-pin<br />

spring contact strip.<br />

The interface modules are each<br />

connected by means of a 48-pin<br />

spring contact strip.<br />

The backplane has vertically arranged<br />

sockets for the backplane<br />

plugs of the modules:<br />

Should you need to exchange the<br />

The backplane also carries the system<br />

serial number (etched into the<br />

backplane chip).<br />

backplane, proceed as follows:<br />

28 Backplane Installation


DANGER! Hazardous voltages<br />

inside the device!<br />

1. Unplug all of the mains cables of<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> to d<strong>is</strong>connect<br />

the system from the mains supply.<br />

Refer to Notes on D<strong>is</strong>connecting<br />

the Mains Supply starting on<br />

<strong>page</strong> 23.<br />

2. Deinstall all modules and power<br />

supply units from the 1-12<br />

frame (see Installing Modules<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 22).<br />

3. Remove the screws on the backplane<br />

(see arrows in the illustration<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>: Backplane<br />

screws). Carefully remove the<br />

backplane from the 1-12 frame,<br />

pulling it out of the frame towards<br />

the front.<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>: Backplane screws<br />

4. From the front, insert the new<br />

backplane into the 1-12 frame.<br />

Insert and tighten the screws to<br />

secure the backplane in the 1-12<br />

frame.<br />

5. Reinstall the modules in the designated<br />

slots.<br />

6. Cover any unused slots with<br />

dummy covers (included in the<br />

scope of delivery).<br />

The dummy covers must be securely<br />

screwed to the frame!<br />

7. Switch the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> on<br />

again. To do so, reconnect the<br />

power supply unit with the<br />

mains supply (if you are powering<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> with two<br />

power supply units, connect the<br />

second unit as well).<br />

8. Observe the module LEDs during<br />

start-up of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

Information on indicators can be<br />

Installation<br />

Backplane<br />

29


found Modules starting on<br />

<strong>page</strong> 52.<br />

If you were using software packages<br />

subject to licensing (e.g.<br />

the internal voice mail program<br />

OpenVoice) prior to exchanging<br />

the backplane, th<strong>is</strong> software<br />

needs to be reactivated using<br />

new activation keys. Contact<br />

your dealer or DeTeWe d<strong>is</strong>tributor.<br />

9. The new keys will be generated<br />

using the backplane serial<br />

number. You will be required to<br />

state th<strong>is</strong> serial number. You can<br />

determine the serial number in<br />

the System Info: Versions menu<br />

in the Configurator.<br />

10. Enter the new activation key in<br />

the SYS Configuration: Licences<br />

menu in the Configurator. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong><br />

will reactivate the software<br />

packages.<br />

The backplane serial number <strong>is</strong><br />

also used to encode the PARK of<br />

a DECT system. If you are using a<br />

DECT system with the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>, you will need to<br />

re-enter the PARK.<br />

11. You can determine the new<br />

PARK in the System Info: Versions<br />

menu in the Configurator.<br />

Uninterruptible Power Supply<br />

If you are using uninterruptible<br />

power supplies (UPS), you must provide<br />

a separate UPS either for the<br />

power supply of each frame (cascaded<br />

PBXs, see PBX Cascading starting<br />

on <strong>page</strong> 98) or for the power<br />

supply of both frames. If one UPS <strong>is</strong><br />

used for both frames, it must be<br />

earthed separately.<br />

An MPS+1-AC power supply unit has<br />

a leakage current of < 0.5 mA.<br />

A 900-watt UPS <strong>is</strong> entirely sufficient<br />

to power the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> (th<strong>is</strong><br />

also applies to cascaded systems).<br />

The total leakage current must <strong>no</strong>t<br />

exceed 3.5 mA per mains socket. Use<br />

the leakage current specified by the<br />

UPS manufacturer as a reference.<br />

30 Uninterruptible Power Supply Installation


Power Failure<br />

In the event of a power failure, the<br />

system memory will retain all data<br />

(program and user data) without<br />

any changes.<br />

The internal clock will continue to<br />

run for 24 hours. If the power failure<br />

lasts <strong>longer</strong> than 24 hours, the time<br />

and date will be reset to the factory<br />

setting when power <strong>is</strong> switched on<br />

again, and updated (by means of a<br />

signal from the exchange) after the<br />

first external outgoing call.<br />

With multi-terminal access configurations,<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> provides<br />

an emergency service feature: In the<br />

event of a power failure, the S 0 1 interface<br />

will be switched to the S 0 8<br />

interface, enabling you to make calls<br />

through a connected terminal.<br />

The following <strong>is</strong> required to enable<br />

emergency service:<br />

■<br />

An MX+S01-8 interface card<br />

must be installed.<br />

■<br />

Port S 0 8 must be configured as<br />

an internal connection. An ISDN<br />

telephone with emergency service<br />

capability must be connected<br />

to th<strong>is</strong> port.<br />

Note: Emergency service <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t possible<br />

with system access configurations.<br />

Testing the Power Failure Circuit<br />

You can test the configuration as follows:<br />

1. D<strong>is</strong>connect the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

from the mains supply (see instructions<br />

in Installing the Central<br />

Control Module starting on<br />

<strong>page</strong> 23, steps 1 to 3).<br />

2. D<strong>is</strong>connect the NTBA from the<br />

mains supply.<br />

3. It should <strong>no</strong>w be possible to<br />

make external calls through the<br />

ISDN telephone connected to<br />

port S 0 8.<br />

■<br />

■<br />

The power failure circuit of th<strong>is</strong><br />

interface card must be activated.<br />

To do so, set DIP switches S17 to<br />

S20 to “ON”. The interface card <strong>is</strong><br />

delivered with the power failure<br />

circuit deactivated (default: off).<br />

Port S 0 1 must be connected to<br />

an NTBA (multi-terminal access)<br />

and configured as an external<br />

connection.<br />

Installation<br />

Power Failure<br />

31


2<br />

1<br />

2<br />

1<br />

ON<br />

ON<br />

S17/18 S19/20<br />

MX+S01-8: Location of the DIP switches for the power failure circuit<br />

32 Power Failure Installation


Interfaces and Connectible<br />

Terminals<br />

Overview<br />

Overview: Interfaces and Interface Cards<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> interfaces have<br />

been implemented as RJ45 sockets<br />

on the front of the interface cards<br />

and the central control module. No<br />

special proprietary cables are required.<br />

Patch panels can be connected<br />

by means of standard patch<br />

cables.<br />

For technical information on the interfaces,<br />

refer to Modules starting on<br />

<strong>page</strong> 52.<br />

Interface Card Properties Page<br />

S 0 MX+S01-8 8 S 0 interfaces for either external or internal<br />

connections<br />

S 2M MT+S2M1-1 1 S 2M interface for connecting to digital<br />

networks (primary multiplex connections)<br />

or for cascading two PBXs<br />

63<br />

60<br />

U pn MS+UPN1-8 8 U pn interfaces, <strong>no</strong>t DECT-capable 65<br />

U pn MS+UPN2-8 8 U pn interfaces, <strong>no</strong>t DECT-capable 66<br />

a/b MS+A1-8 8 a/b interfaces 68<br />

PCM MC+1-3 1 PCM port<br />

(on central control module)<br />

LAN MC+1-3 1 Ethernet port (10/100 Mbits/s)<br />

(on central control module)<br />

COM / V.24 MC+1-3 2 V.24 ports<br />

(on central control module)<br />

57<br />

57<br />

57<br />

The following terminals and systems<br />

can be connected to the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>:<br />

Interfaces and Connectible Terminals<br />

Overview<br />

33


Overview: Interfaces and Connectible Terminals<br />

Interface Terminals/Systems Page<br />

S 0 (internal)<br />

U pn<br />

a/b<br />

ISDN terminals (DSS1 protocol):<br />

telephones, fax machines, base stations and handsets, ISDN<br />

cards for PCs<br />

Digital terminals (ISDN terminals, system telephones) and<br />

DECT base stations<br />

Analogue terminals:<br />

telephones, G3 fax machines, (external or internal) modems,<br />

external music-on-hold devices, external voice mail<br />

systems, external intercom systems<br />

PCM Connection of a second PBX (PBX cascading) 43<br />

LAN<br />

Connection to a LAN (local area network) or of a DSL<br />

modem<br />

COM / V.24 Connection of a PC (for transmitting connection data) 44<br />

34<br />

38<br />

40<br />

43<br />

S 0 Ports<br />

All of the eight S 0 interfaces on the<br />

MX+S01-8 interface card are switchable,<br />

i.e. they can be used either for<br />

external connections (ISDN basic access<br />

or a second PBX) or for internal<br />

connections (ISDN terminals). It <strong>is</strong><br />

<strong>no</strong>t possible to use these interfaces<br />

simultaneously for both types of<br />

connections.<br />

The S 0 ports have been implemented<br />

as RJ45 sockets.<br />

Pin Assignment<br />

+ + – –<br />

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />

S 0 interface pin assignment<br />

The following table explains the S 0<br />

interface pin assignment.<br />

34 S 0 Ports Interfaces and Connectible Terminals


Pin Number Assignment<br />

1 Not used<br />

2 Not used<br />

3 Send +<br />

4 Receive +<br />

5 Receive -<br />

6 Send -<br />

7 Not used<br />

8 Not used<br />

Termination<br />

Each interface card has 16 DIP<br />

switches (S1 to S16, two per S 0 interface).<br />

The DIP switches activate the<br />

required terminating res<strong>is</strong>tors for<br />

the S 0 buses (100 ohms per S 0 bus).<br />

In the default setting, all terminating<br />

res<strong>is</strong>tors are activated (Default:<br />

on).<br />

ON<br />

1 2<br />

MX+S01-8: Location of DIP switches S1 to S16<br />

Note: The following configuration<br />

information applies to external as<br />

well as internal S 0 interfaces.<br />

Bus Configuration: <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

at the End of an S 0 Bus<br />

If a <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> connected at<br />

the end of an S 0 bus, the terminating<br />

res<strong>is</strong>tors of the relevant S 0 interface<br />

cards must be activated.<br />

In a typical configuration, the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> will be connected to<br />

the network termination for basic<br />

access (NTBA) with an externally<br />

switched S 0 port; therefore, all terminating<br />

res<strong>is</strong>tors of the interface<br />

card are activated in the default setting.<br />

Interfaces and Connectible Terminals<br />

S 0 Ports<br />

35


<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

MX+S01-8: Terminating res<strong>is</strong>tors activated<br />

One end of the S 0 bus <strong>is</strong> terminated<br />

by the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>; the terminating<br />

res<strong>is</strong>tors must be activated (DIP<br />

switches set to “on”).<br />

IAE = ISDN socket (German: “ISDN<br />

Anschluß Einheit”) or ISDN terminal.<br />

TR = Terminating Res<strong>is</strong>tor, the S 0<br />

termination. The TR must be at the<br />

termination of the line. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> can also<br />

be done by an appropriately wired<br />

IAE.<br />

1a<br />

1b<br />

2a<br />

2b<br />

IAE<br />

TR<br />

TR<br />

IAE<br />

ON<br />

1 2<br />

Termination on an ISDN socket<br />

The illustration Termination on an<br />

ISDN socket shows an IAE with integrated<br />

terminating res<strong>is</strong>tors.<br />

TR<br />

Bus Configuration: <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

in in the Middle of an S 0 Bus<br />

If a <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> connected in<br />

the middle of an S 0 bus, the terminating<br />

res<strong>is</strong>tors of the relevant S 0 interface<br />

cards must be deactivated.<br />

1. Remove the interface card by<br />

following the instructions in Installing<br />

Interface Cards starting<br />

on <strong>page</strong> 25.<br />

2. The DIP switches are protected<br />

by a plastic foil. Use a pointed<br />

tool such as a screwdriver to<br />

slide the DIP switches down (see<br />

arrow in the illustration<br />

MX+S01-8: Terminating res<strong>is</strong>tors<br />

deactivated).<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

TR<br />

IAE<br />

ON<br />

IAE<br />

1 2<br />

MX+S01-8: Terminating res<strong>is</strong>tors deactivated<br />

Both ends of the S 0 bus are terminated<br />

by terminating res<strong>is</strong>tors; the<br />

terminating res<strong>is</strong>tors must be deactivated<br />

(DIP switches set to “1 2”).<br />

External ISDN Ports<br />

(S 0 External)<br />

You can connect the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

to the NTBA or to a second<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> for PBX cascading.<br />

TR<br />

36 S 0 Ports Interfaces and Connectible Terminals


To connect the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> to the<br />

NTBA, wire pins 3, 4, 5, 6 of the NTBA<br />

and of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> 1:1.<br />

To directly connect two<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> systems via the external<br />

S 0 ports, connect the RJ45 sockets<br />

of the systems by means of a<br />

crossed tw<strong>is</strong>ted-pair cable. The d<strong>is</strong>tance<br />

between the two PBXs must<br />

<strong>no</strong>t exceed 1000 metres (see also<br />

PBX Networking starting on<br />

<strong>page</strong> 102).<br />

TK-Anlage 1, S 0 ext<br />

ISDN terminals can be connected to<br />

internal S 0 ports by means of a<br />

crossed ISDN cable. For the pin assignment<br />

of crossed ISDN cables, refer<br />

to the illustration Wiring for direct<br />

connection on <strong>page</strong> 37. If the terminal<br />

did <strong>no</strong>t come with a suitable<br />

ISDN cable, contact your dealer or<br />

DeTeWe d<strong>is</strong>tributor.<br />

The length of an internal S 0 bus cable<br />

must <strong>no</strong>t exceed 150 m. Each internal<br />

S 0 bus has a power feed of approx.<br />

3 W. The feed voltage <strong>is</strong> –42 V.<br />

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1<br />

TK-Anlage 2, S 0 ext<br />

(RJ 45-Buchsen)<br />

Wiring for direct connection<br />

Internal S 0 Ports<br />

Up to eight ISDN terminals per bus<br />

can be connected to the internal S 0<br />

ports by means of four-wire cables.<br />

Three of these terminals can be supplied<br />

with power from the bus; any<br />

additional terminals will require<br />

their own power supply. The internal<br />

S 0 buses can be used for point-tomultipoint<br />

connections in accordance<br />

with the DSS1 protocol (Euro<br />

ISDN).<br />

Interfaces and Connectible Terminals<br />

S 0 Ports<br />

37


U pn Ports<br />

Terminals Connected to<br />

U pn Ports<br />

U pn ports can be used to connect<br />

one of the following system terminal<br />

types:<br />

■<br />

RFP 21 DECT base station<br />

■ OpenPhone 61, OpenPhone 63<br />

or OpenPhone 65 system telephone<br />

■<br />

OpenPhone 52 ISDN system terminal<br />

The (corded) OpenPhone 63 and<br />

OpenPhone 65 system telephones<br />

can be cascaded by means of a U pn<br />

adapter, which enables you to connect<br />

two OpenPhones to one U pn<br />

port. For further information, refer<br />

to the “OpenPhone 61, 63, 65” user<br />

guide.<br />

The RFP 21 DECT base station can be<br />

used to connect the OpenPhone 21<br />

and OpenPhone 25 DECT handsets.<br />

The OpenPhone 25 has a V.24 interface<br />

for data transm<strong>is</strong>sions and Internet<br />

access. Note that handsets<br />

such as the OpenPhone 21 can also<br />

be used in conjunction with base<br />

stations operating with the GAP/CAP<br />

standard.<br />

Note on the MS+UPN2-8<br />

Interface Card<br />

U pn interfaces can only be used to<br />

connect DECT base stations if the<br />

MS+UPN2-8 has been installed in<br />

the master system; if th<strong>is</strong> card <strong>is</strong> in<br />

the slave system, it <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t possible to<br />

connect any DECT base stations to<br />

the card’s U pn interfaces.<br />

Note on the MS+UPN1-8<br />

Interface Card<br />

The U pn interfaces of the<br />

MS+UPN1-8 interface card can<strong>no</strong>t<br />

be used to connect DECT base stations.<br />

Technical Information<br />

The U pn ports have been implemented<br />

as RJ45 sockets.<br />

Each of the devices l<strong>is</strong>ted above can<br />

be connected to the U pn interface by<br />

means of a two-wire 1:1 cable. System<br />

terminals come with a suitable<br />

cable for connection to the RJ45<br />

socket of the interface.<br />

A two-wire cable connected to a U pn<br />

port can be up to 1000 m long, provided<br />

it <strong>is</strong> a 0.6 mm tw<strong>is</strong>ted-pair cable.<br />

Each U pn port has a power feed of<br />

approx. 3 W. The short-circuit-proof<br />

feed voltage <strong>is</strong> –42 V.<br />

38 U pn Ports Interfaces and Connectible Terminals


DECT Base Station<br />

Connection Variants<br />

A DECT base station can be connected<br />

to either one or two U pn interfaces:<br />

Pin Assignment<br />

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />

U pn interface pin assignment<br />

■<br />

■<br />

If the DECT base station <strong>is</strong> connected<br />

to one U pn interface, four<br />

simultaneous calls or connections<br />

can be made through the<br />

handsets.<br />

If the DECT base station <strong>is</strong> connected<br />

to two U pn interfaces,<br />

eight simultaneous calls or connections<br />

can be made through<br />

the handsets.<br />

The following table explains the U pn<br />

interface pin assignment.<br />

Pin Number<br />

Assignment<br />

1 Not used<br />

2 Not used<br />

3 U pn a *)<br />

4 U pn a<br />

5 U pn b<br />

Please <strong>no</strong>te that it <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t possible to<br />

establ<strong>is</strong>h more simultaneous external<br />

connections than there are external<br />

B channels.<br />

To connect a DECT base station to<br />

two U pn interfaces, you can combine<br />

two U pn ports on the MS+UPN2-8<br />

interface card: U pn ports 1+2, 3+4,<br />

5+6 or 7+8 (U pn port 2 <strong>is</strong> connected<br />

to U pn port 1, U pn port 4 to U pn<br />

port 3 etc.). Ports are combined by<br />

setting the DIP switches on the card<br />

accordingly. In th<strong>is</strong> configuration,<br />

the DECT base station must be connected<br />

to the first U pn port of the<br />

pair by means of a 1:1 cable (system<br />

telephone cable).<br />

6 U pn b *)<br />

7 Not used<br />

8 Not used<br />

*) If the DIP switches are set accordingly,<br />

the conductors of the adjacent<br />

U pn port will be connected here; use<br />

only the first U pn port in th<strong>is</strong> configuration.<br />

Setting DIP Switches<br />

1. Remove the interface card by<br />

following the instructions in Installing<br />

Interface Cards starting<br />

on <strong>page</strong> 25.<br />

2. The DIP switches are protected<br />

by a plastic foil. Use a pointed<br />

tool such as a screwdriver to<br />

slide the DIP switches to the<br />

Interfaces and Connectible Terminals<br />

U pn Ports<br />

39


ight (see arrow in the illustration<br />

Location of the DIP switches<br />

on the MS+UPN2-8 interface card<br />

on <strong>page</strong> 40).<br />

ON<br />

1 2<br />

Location of the DIP switches on the MS+UPN2-8 interface card<br />

a/b Ports<br />

Terminals Connected to<br />

a/b Ports<br />

a/b ports can be used to connect analogue<br />

terminals, e.g. apparatus for<br />

speech and data communications<br />

using pulse or DTMF dialling, e.g.:<br />

■<br />

■<br />

analogue telephones,<br />

G3 fax machines,<br />

■<br />

■<br />

external voice mail systems,<br />

external intercom systems.<br />

Please <strong>no</strong>te: Observe the following<br />

<strong>no</strong>tes on connecting analogue<br />

terminals. Terminals that do <strong>no</strong>t sat<strong>is</strong>fy<br />

the technical requirements for<br />

connection with the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

may cause damage to the communications<br />

system!<br />

■<br />

■<br />

(external or internal) analogue<br />

modems,<br />

external music-on-hold devices,<br />

Analogue Telephones<br />

If analogue telephones are to be<br />

connected, we recommend devices<br />

that support dual-tone multi-fre-<br />

40 a/b Ports Interfaces and Connectible Terminals


quency (DTMF) dialling as it <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t<br />

possible to use the additional features<br />

of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> with<br />

pulse dialling telephones.<br />

Modems<br />

The maximum transm<strong>is</strong>sion rate for<br />

analogue modems <strong>is</strong> 33.6 kbits/s<br />

(V.34+).<br />

Music on Hold<br />

A suitable external device for music<br />

on hold <strong>is</strong> the Genius 2000, manufactured<br />

by Speech Design. If you are<br />

<strong>no</strong>t using an external MoH device,<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> offers an internal<br />

MoH feature: You can change the<br />

MoH melody in the SYS Configuration:<br />

Components menu of the Configurator.<br />

For further information,<br />

refer to the online help.<br />

Please <strong>no</strong>te: For external music<br />

on hold, use only devices with an input<br />

impedance of 600 ohms, floating<br />

connection. An incorrect input impedance<br />

can cause irreparable damage to<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>!<br />

The external voice mail system can<br />

be connected to internal a/b ports as<br />

well as to internal S 0 ports. For both<br />

port types the voice mail system can<br />

activate the <strong>no</strong>tification for system<br />

terminals with the code procedures<br />

*68 resp. #68.<br />

Intercom System (for a/b)<br />

The intercom systems “DoorLine<br />

T01/02” and “DoorLine T03/04” of<br />

the german Telekom’s div<strong>is</strong>ion<br />

T-Com can be connected via the<br />

“DoorLine M06” to any a/b port. The<br />

“Doorline” module provides the actor<br />

for the door opener contact.<br />

Observe the following for connection<br />

and use of the intercom system:<br />

■<br />

■<br />

The intercom system and the<br />

“Doorline” module should be set<br />

to their factory settings.<br />

In the PBX Configuration:<br />

Ports: a/b: Change menu in the<br />

Configurator, select Doorline<br />

under Type.<br />

Voice Mail<br />

If you are using an external voice<br />

mail system, it must be capable of<br />

handling the number of digits used<br />

for internal telephone numbers, e.g.<br />

five digits if you have configured<br />

five-digit internal numbers. We recommend<br />

the following Speech Design<br />

products: Memo 200/300/400<br />

or Memo 200-A/300-A/400-A.<br />

■<br />

■<br />

The “Doorline” intercom system<br />

has a number of bell keys to<br />

which you can assign different<br />

call numbers in the<br />

PBX Configuration: Ports:<br />

Doorline menu in the Configurator.<br />

You can call the “Doorline” intercom<br />

system by entering the<br />

code procedure *102.<br />

Interfaces and Connectible Terminals<br />

a/b Ports<br />

41


■<br />

The “Doorline” actor can be operated<br />

only when the speech<br />

channel <strong>is</strong> open at the same<br />

time.<br />

Pin Assignment<br />

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />

■<br />

The “Doorline” intercom system<br />

can be connected to any a/b<br />

port. However, you can use only<br />

one “Doorline” with the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

For details on installing and configuring<br />

the “Doorline” intercom system,<br />

refer to the product user guide.<br />

The intercom system should be installed<br />

by qualified personnel only<br />

as sensor/actor contacts will need to<br />

be connected for th<strong>is</strong> procedure.<br />

Technical Information<br />

a/b interface pin assignment<br />

The following Table explains the a/b<br />

interface pin assignment.<br />

Pin Number<br />

Assignment<br />

1 Not used<br />

2 Not used<br />

3 Not used<br />

4 Channel a<br />

5 Channel b<br />

6 Not used<br />

7 Not used<br />

8 Not used<br />

The a/b ports have been implemented<br />

as RJ45 sockets. Each of the<br />

devices l<strong>is</strong>ted above can be connected<br />

to the a/b interface by means<br />

of a two-wire 1:1 cable.<br />

A two-wire cable connected to an<br />

a/b port can be up to 6500 m long,<br />

provided it <strong>is</strong> a 0.6 mm tw<strong>is</strong>ted-pair<br />

cable, or up to 3000 m if a 0.4 mm<br />

tw<strong>is</strong>ted-pair cable <strong>is</strong> used.<br />

The 50 Hz/40 V AC ringing voltage of<br />

the eight interfaces <strong>is</strong> supplied by<br />

the interface card.<br />

42 a/b Ports Interfaces and Connectible Terminals


PCM Port<br />

The PCM port on the MC+1-3 central<br />

control module <strong>is</strong> used to cascade<br />

two PBXs.<br />

Cascaded PBXs must be connected<br />

by means of a tw<strong>is</strong>ted-pair cable<br />

with RJ45 plugs. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> cable transmits<br />

voice data as well as admin<strong>is</strong>tration<br />

data between the PBXs.<br />

All eight pins of the cable must be<br />

wired 1:1. Connect the cable to the<br />

PCM port of the MC+1-3 central control<br />

module of each of the two PBXs.<br />

The shielded CAT-5 cable must <strong>no</strong>t<br />

be <strong>longer</strong> than 50 centimetres.<br />

For further information, refer to PBX<br />

Cascading starting on <strong>page</strong> 98.<br />

LAN Port<br />

The LAN port (Ethernet interface) on<br />

the MC+1-3 central control module<br />

allows the integration of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> into a company LAN<br />

(Local Area Network) with the use of<br />

a 10-Mbit hub or switch. In such a<br />

configuration, the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

can, for example, act as an IP router<br />

for establ<strong>is</strong>hing Internet connections.<br />

The Ethernet interface supports<br />

transm<strong>is</strong>sion rates of 10 Mbits/s and<br />

100 Mbits/s in half duplex or full duplex<br />

mode. The transm<strong>is</strong>sion rate<br />

and mode are selected automatically<br />

(Auto Sensing function).<br />

A LAN cable (tw<strong>is</strong>ted-pair in accordance<br />

with 10BaseT or 100BaseTX)<br />

must <strong>no</strong>t be <strong>longer</strong> than 100 m. Safe<br />

operation with 100 Mbits/s requires<br />

the use of category 5 cables and<br />

sockets. Use a shielded Ethernet<br />

cable (STP cable, Shielded Tw<strong>is</strong>ted<br />

Pair cable).<br />

DSL<br />

External DSL modems can be connected<br />

via the LAN port. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> requires<br />

the use of an external switch<br />

or hub which connects the output of<br />

the DSL modem (NTBBA) to the LAN<br />

port of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. The router<br />

will then convert the PPPoE protocol<br />

to the TCP/IP protocol of the LAN.<br />

The DSL modem <strong>is</strong> connected by<br />

means of a crossed tw<strong>is</strong>ted-pair cable.<br />

Alternatively, you can use a<br />

switchable port on the hub, which <strong>is</strong><br />

usually marked with an “X”.<br />

Interfaces and Connectible Terminals<br />

PCM Port<br />

43


TAE<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong><br />

DSL & Uk 0<br />

DSL<br />

Splitter<br />

DSL<br />

Uk 0<br />

NTBA<br />

S 0<br />

S 0<br />

Net<br />

TCP/IP &<br />

PPPoE<br />

PC<br />

DSL<br />

Modem<br />

Crosslinked tw<strong>is</strong>ted pair cable<br />

PPPoE<br />

Hub<br />

TCP/IP<br />

Net<br />

Network connection of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> via ISDN and DSL<br />

Service PC<br />

The Ethernet interface can also be<br />

used to connect a service PC using a<br />

crossed Ethernet cable.<br />

COM Port<br />

The COM port (V.24-1 interface) on<br />

the MC+1-3 central control module<br />

can be used to connect a PC for the<br />

purpose of transmitting connection<br />

data. Connection data can be analysed<br />

in detail with the connection<br />

data recording program OpenCount.<br />

Please <strong>no</strong>te: The COM port cable<br />

must <strong>no</strong>t be <strong>longer</strong> than 3 metres.<br />

The V.24 interface uses a transm<strong>is</strong>sion<br />

rate of 19.2 kbits/s.<br />

Note: A special 10-pin cable <strong>is</strong> required<br />

for connecting apparatus to<br />

the V.24-1 interface. Contact your De-<br />

TeWe d<strong>is</strong>tributor or local retailer if you<br />

want to purchase one of these cables.<br />

Pin Assignment<br />

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10<br />

V.24 interface pin assignment<br />

44 COM Port Interfaces and Connectible Terminals


The following Table explains the V.24<br />

interface pin assignment.<br />

Pin Number<br />

Assignment<br />

1 GND (EED)<br />

2 Not used<br />

3 DTR<br />

4 CTS<br />

5 TXD<br />

6 RTS<br />

7 RXD<br />

8 DSR<br />

9 DCD<br />

10 Not used<br />

Interfaces and Connectible Terminals<br />

COM Port<br />

45


Accessories and Adapters<br />

The OpenPhone 63 and<br />

OpenPhone 65 system telephones<br />

have one or two slots on the rear for<br />

various adapters and other accessories.<br />

Further information on installing<br />

and operating these add-ons can<br />

be found in the “OpenPhone 61, 63,<br />

65” user guide under “Add-ons (with<br />

& without an Adapter)”.<br />

In the following you will find technical<br />

details on the add-ons and a l<strong>is</strong>t<br />

of compatible accessories.<br />

U pn Adapter<br />

The U pn adapter <strong>is</strong> an adapter with a<br />

U pn port for connecting a<strong>no</strong>ther<br />

OpenPhone 61, 63, 65 system telephone<br />

and a socket for an extra<br />

plug-in power supply.<br />

Weight: 70 g<br />

Dimensions: 73 x 60 x 30 mm<br />

Power consumption: max. 195 mW<br />

Cable length: max. 30 m<br />

Please <strong>no</strong>te: The U pn adapter<br />

may be used only for connecting the<br />

system terminals l<strong>is</strong>ted above. The<br />

U pn extension cable must <strong>no</strong>t exceed<br />

30 m in length and must <strong>no</strong>t be used<br />

outdoors.<br />

Note: An extra plug-in power supply<br />

<strong>is</strong> required to operate combinations<br />

of equipment with a power consumption<br />

that exceeds the power<br />

output of the U pn ports.<br />

a/b Adapter<br />

You can use an a/b adapter to connect<br />

analogue terminals to the<br />

OpenPhone 63 and OpenPhone 65<br />

system telephones.<br />

Connecting an a/b adapter will result<br />

in exceeding the feed performance<br />

of the U pn port, regardless of<br />

the range. Therefore a plug-in power<br />

supply must be additionally connected<br />

to the a/b adapter.<br />

Note: Please use the plug-in power<br />

supply with the product code<br />

4505759. The plug-in power supply<br />

for use in the UK has the product code<br />

4<strong>510</strong>694 .<br />

Weight: 70g<br />

Dimensions: 73 x 60 x 30 mm<br />

Power consumption: max. 160 mW<br />

Cable length: max. 3 m<br />

Audio Adapter<br />

The audio adapter <strong>is</strong> an adapter extension<br />

with four different ports for<br />

external audio and signalling devices.<br />

46 Accessories and Adapters


Weight: 70g<br />

Dimensions: 73 x 60 x 30 mm<br />

Power consumption: max. 260 mW<br />

(with relay active).<br />

Audio Adapter Pin Assignment<br />

Port Used for Socket Assignment<br />

1 Ear cap,<br />

second handset,<br />

headset,<br />

active speaker or microphone<br />

2 Recording device; relay<br />

contact generates signal<br />

for starting and<br />

stopping recording.<br />

3 Not used on<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

RJ-10<br />

(4-pin<br />

Western<br />

socket)<br />

Stereo jack,<br />

3.5 mm<br />

Round power<br />

socket<br />

(4 mm)<br />

4 Door d<strong>is</strong>play RJ-11 or<br />

RJ-12<br />

(6-pin<br />

Western socket)<br />

1: microphone -<br />

2: speaker +<br />

3: speaker -<br />

4: microphone +<br />

1 (GND): recording<br />

signal, relay contact 1<br />

2 (peak): recording signal +<br />

3 (ring): relay contact 1<br />

-<br />

4, 5: relay contact 2<br />

1, 2, 3, 6: NC<br />

Electrical Data of Ports<br />

Port<br />

Microphone,<br />

microphone of second handset,<br />

headset microphone<br />

Ear cap,<br />

loudspeaker of second handset,<br />

headset, headset loudspeaker<br />

Active speaker<br />

Connection Values<br />

Electret microphone<br />

Typical sensitivity: 10 mV/Pa<br />

Power feed: I < 300µA at 1.5V<br />

Typical impedance: 150 ± 30 ohms<br />

Typical sensitivity: 94 dB/1 mW<br />

(0 dB = 20 µPa)<br />

Max. output voltage: 1 V rms<br />

at input impedance > 10 kohms<br />

Accessories and Adapters<br />

47


Electrical Data of Ports<br />

Port<br />

Recording device audio input<br />

Recording device start/stop<br />

(relay contact 1)<br />

Door d<strong>is</strong>play<br />

(relay contact 2)<br />

Connection Values<br />

Typical input sensitivity: 0.24 mV<br />

(microphone level)<br />

Max. switching voltage: 50 VDC/29 V AC<br />

Max. switching current: 1 ADC/0.7 A AC<br />

Max. switching voltage: 50 VDC/29 V AC<br />

Max. switching current: 1 ADC/0.7 A AC<br />

Approved Devices /<br />

Approved Accessories<br />

Please <strong>no</strong>te: Only the following,<br />

recommended accessories may be<br />

connected to the audio adapter. The<br />

cable to the door d<strong>is</strong>play must <strong>no</strong>t be<br />

run outdoors.<br />

The following devices are recommended:<br />

Type<br />

Manufacturer, Product Designation<br />

Headset: GN-Netcom, Profile binaural (1869-00-03)<br />

Headset adapter cable:<br />

Second handset<br />

GN-Netcom, Profile 3-in-1 (1866-00-04)<br />

GN Netcom, QD cable (quick coupling), smooth,<br />

Mod 4 (8800-00-01)<br />

Siemens, L30351-F600-A366<br />

Handset DeTeWe, OpenPhone 60<br />

Microphone: Winfinity, 4511326 / H 282-18<br />

Loudspeaker:<br />

Recording device:<br />

Siemens, L30460-X1278-X<br />

No recommendation<br />

48 Accessories and Adapters


Device Combinations<br />

You can use the following power values<br />

to calculate the power consumption<br />

of combined equipment:<br />

■<br />

U pn adapter: 195 mW<br />

These symbols are used in the following<br />

tables:<br />

● <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> combination <strong>is</strong> possible.<br />

❍ Reduced tone ringing, open l<strong>is</strong>tening<br />

and hands-free talking volume<br />

possible.<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

Audio adapter: 260 mW<br />

a/b adapter: 160 mW<br />

(must be combined with a plugin<br />

power supply!)<br />

OpenPhone 61: 1,000 mW<br />

OpenPhone 63: 1,025 mW<br />

OpenPhone 65: 1,140 mW<br />

Configurations without<br />

Plug-in Power Supply<br />

(Range up to 500 m)<br />

The following table shows examples<br />

of equipment combinations for<br />

which the maximum power consumption<br />

of 2.4 W <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t exceeded.<br />

■ Up to three add-on keypads:<br />

330 mW<br />

Basic Unit: OpenPhone 63<br />

Add-ons Second Terminal Power<br />

Audio adapter U pn adapter Up to 3 keypad<br />

modules<br />

– – – – 1025 mW<br />

● – – – 1285 mW<br />

– ● – OpenPhone 61 2220 mW<br />

– ● – OpenPhone 63<br />

without adapter<br />

– ● – OpenPhone 65<br />

without adapter or<br />

keypad module<br />

2245 mW<br />

2360 mW<br />

Accessories and Adapters<br />

49


Basic Unit: OpenPhone 65<br />

Add-ons Second Terminal Power<br />

Audio adapter U pn adapter Up to 3 keypad<br />

modules<br />

– – – – 1140 mW<br />

– – ● – 1470 mW<br />

● – ● – 1730 mW<br />

– ● – OpenPhone 61 2335 mW<br />

– ● – OpenPhone 63<br />

without adapter<br />

– ❍ – OpenPhone 65<br />

without adapter or<br />

keypad module<br />

2360 mW<br />

2475 mW<br />

Configurations without<br />

Plug-in Power Supply<br />

(Range 500 to 1000 m)<br />

The following table shows examples<br />

of equipment combinations for<br />

which the maximum power consumption<br />

of 2.2 W <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t exceeded.<br />

Basic Unit Add-ons Power<br />

Audio adapter U pn adapter Up to 3<br />

keypad modules<br />

OpenPhone 63 ● – – 1285 mW<br />

OpenPhone 65 – – ● 1470 mW<br />

● – ● 1730 mW<br />

50 Accessories and Adapters


Configurations with<br />

Plug-in Power Supplies<br />

The following table shows examples<br />

of equipment combinations operating<br />

with additional power from a<br />

plug-in power supply.<br />

Basic Unit: OpenPhone 63<br />

Add-ons:<br />

Second terminal<br />

Up to 3<br />

keypad<br />

modules<br />

Audio<br />

adapter<br />

U pn adapter<br />

and plug-in<br />

power<br />

supply<br />

OpenPhone 61 OpenPhone 63<br />

without<br />

adapter<br />

OpenPhone 65<br />

without<br />

adapter and<br />

with 1 keypad<br />

module<br />

●<br />

●<br />

●<br />

●<br />

●<br />

●<br />

Basic Unit: OpenPhone 65<br />

Add-ons:<br />

Second terminal<br />

Up to 3<br />

keypad<br />

modules<br />

Audio<br />

adapter<br />

U pn adapter<br />

and plug-in<br />

power supply<br />

OpenPhone 61 OpenPhone 63<br />

without<br />

adapter<br />

OpenPhone 65<br />

without<br />

adapter and<br />

with 1 keypad<br />

module<br />

● ● ●<br />

● ● ●<br />

● ● ●<br />

● ● ● ●<br />

● ● ● ●<br />

● ● ● ●<br />

Accessories and Adapters<br />

51


Modules<br />

<strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> chapter provides detailed technical<br />

information on the modules<br />

which can be installed in the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. You will find information<br />

on their respective fields of application,<br />

along with technical and<br />

operational information and <strong>no</strong>tes<br />

on indicators.<br />

Please <strong>no</strong>te: When installing<br />

modules, always observe the Notes<br />

on Safety starting on <strong>page</strong> 17!<br />

The modules fulfil the following<br />

tasks:<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

Power supply units (max. 2) provide<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> with<br />

power.<br />

A central control module controls<br />

the entire system. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> module<br />

also houses the memory card<br />

(CompactFlash) for storing data.<br />

Interface cards are used to connect<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> to the<br />

telecommunications network<br />

(or to a<strong>no</strong>ther communications<br />

system) and to connect terminals.<br />

A number of interface cards are<br />

available for these tasks. Depending<br />

on the interface card’s<br />

functions, it may also be referred<br />

to as a trunk module or as a subscriber<br />

module.<br />

For detailed information on installing<br />

modules, refer to the chapter Installing<br />

Modules starting on <strong>page</strong> 22.<br />

52 Modules


Module Naming Conventions<br />

The names of the modules indicate<br />

the module type and functions:<br />

Mx+y1-z<br />

Abbr.<br />

M<br />

x<br />

Meaning<br />

Module<br />

Indicates the module type as<br />

follows:<br />

C<br />

S<br />

T<br />

X<br />

PS<br />

Control<br />

Subscriber<br />

Trunk<br />

Subscriber/Trunk<br />

Power Supply<br />

+ Character used to divide the<br />

product name<br />

y<br />

Indicates the interface type as<br />

follows:<br />

A<br />

UPN<br />

Analogue interface<br />

U pn interface<br />

S0<br />

S 0 interface<br />

S2M<br />

S2M interface<br />

1 Module generation<br />

- Character used to divide the<br />

product name<br />

z<br />

Number of interfaces<br />

Modules<br />

Module Naming Conventions<br />

53


Overview of Available Modules<br />

The following table provides an<br />

overview of modules available for<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>:<br />

Name Description Page<br />

MPS+1-AC Power supply with AC/DC converter 55<br />

MC+1-3 Central control module with three interfaces 57<br />

MT+S2M1-1<br />

MX+S01-8<br />

MS+UPN1-8<br />

MS+UPN2-8<br />

MS+A1-8<br />

Trunk module with one S 2M interface for connecting to digital<br />

networks or for cascading two PBXs<br />

Trunk or subscriber module with eight S 0 interfaces for either<br />

external (trunk) or internal (subscriber) connections<br />

Subscriber module with eight U pn interfaces for connecting<br />

digital terminals (ISDN terminals, system telephones); does<br />

<strong>no</strong>t support DECT base stations<br />

Subscriber module with eight U pn interfaces for connecting<br />

digital terminals (ISDN terminals, system telephones) and<br />

DECT base stations<br />

Subscriber module with eight a/b interfaces for connecting<br />

analogue terminals<br />

60<br />

63<br />

65<br />

66<br />

68<br />

The name of the module and the interface<br />

type are printed on the front<br />

of the modules. The following illustration<br />

shows the printing on the<br />

MX+S01-8 interface card.<br />

MX+S01-8<br />

S0 1<br />

S0 2<br />

Detail: Printing on the front of an<br />

MX+S01-8 interface card<br />

54 Overview of Available Modules Modules


MPS+1-AC<br />

Field of Application<br />

The MPS+1-AC power supply unit<br />

supplies power to the first six slots<br />

(1 to 6) of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. The<br />

MPS+1-AC converts the output voltages<br />

(220 V/110 V) output voltages<br />

into a DC voltage (+3.3 V and –42 V).<br />

If the remaining slots (7 to 12) are to<br />

be used, a second MPS+1-AC power<br />

supply unit will need to be installed.<br />

MPS+1-AC<br />

Technical Data<br />

The following data refer to the supply<br />

of power to the first six slots.<br />

Input Voltage<br />

Rated voltage<br />

Voltage range<br />

Rated current<br />

Efficiency at rated<br />

load<br />

230 V via standard<br />

IEC connector<br />

95 V to 275 V<br />

2.0 A at 115 V<br />

1.0 A at 230 V<br />

0.9 A at 275 V<br />

> 80 %<br />

+3.3 V Output Voltage<br />

Rated voltage<br />

Voltage range<br />

Rated current<br />

Current limitation<br />

Short-circuit<br />

+3.3 V<br />

+3.2 V... +3.4 V<br />

10.0 A<br />

12 A to 15 A<br />

Continuous shortcircuit<br />

protection<br />

–42 V Output Voltage<br />

Rated voltage<br />

Voltage range<br />

–42 V<br />

–40 V... –44 V<br />

MPS+1-AC: Front view<br />

Modules<br />

MPS+1-AC<br />

55


–42 V Output Voltage<br />

Rated current<br />

Current limitation<br />

Short-circuit<br />

4.0 A<br />

4.4 A to 5.5 A<br />

Continuous shortcircuit<br />

protection<br />

In the event of a power failure, the<br />

power supply unit will generate a<br />

power failure signal.<br />

Indicators<br />

There are two LEDs on the front of<br />

the MPS+1-AC power supply unit.<br />

The LEDs indicate the following:<br />

■<br />

■<br />

Left: If the left LED <strong>is</strong> constantly<br />

lit up green, the output voltage<br />

<strong>is</strong> +3.3 V.<br />

Right: If the right LED <strong>is</strong> constantly<br />

lit up green, the output<br />

voltage <strong>is</strong> –42 V.<br />

The LEDs only indicate that the voltage<br />

<strong>is</strong> present. They do <strong>no</strong>t say anything<br />

about the voltage quality.<br />

Operational Information<br />

The MPS+1-AC power supply unit<br />

will be ready for operation as soon as<br />

it has been plugged into the designated<br />

slot (see Slots starting on<br />

<strong>page</strong> 22).<br />

The mains voltage of 230 V <strong>is</strong> drawn<br />

through the standard IEC connector.<br />

The output voltages are fed to the<br />

BPV+1-12 backplane through the<br />

96-pin spring contact strip (see<br />

Backplane starting on <strong>page</strong> 28).<br />

56 MPS+1-AC Modules


MC+1-3<br />

MC+1-3<br />

These are standard external Ethernet<br />

(1x) and V.24 (2x) interfaces as well<br />

as internal PCMV, PCMH and CompactFlash<br />

slot interfaces.<br />

Technical Information<br />

PCM<br />

Ethernet<br />

■<br />

■<br />

The MC+1-3 central control<br />

module <strong>is</strong> powered by the<br />

group 1 power supply unit.<br />

The MC+1-3 central control<br />

module has a plug-in card<br />

(MSUB-MRAM) with 128 Mbytes<br />

of main (random access) memory.<br />

V.24-1<br />

V.24-2<br />

Please <strong>no</strong>te: <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> plug-in card<br />

must <strong>no</strong>t be exchanged by service<br />

personnel. In the event of a malfunction,<br />

the entire MC+1-3 central control<br />

module must be sent in for repair.<br />

MC+1-3: Front view<br />

Field of Application<br />

The MC+1-3 module <strong>is</strong> the central<br />

control module of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. It can be installed in<br />

slot 0 only (at the left end in the 1-12<br />

frame; see Slots starting on<br />

<strong>page</strong> 22).<br />

■<br />

The MC+1-3 central control<br />

module has a CompactFlash slot<br />

(MSUB-MFL, PCMCIA interface)<br />

for CompactFlash cards. The following<br />

data are stored on the<br />

CompactFlash card: the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> firmware, the system<br />

terminal software, the configuration<br />

data and all customer<br />

data such as audio files for the<br />

internal voice mail system.<br />

In addition to the control function,<br />

the MC+1-3 central control module<br />

provides a number of interfaces.<br />

Note: Only licensed cards may be<br />

used. These are currently (May 2004)<br />

special 256-Mbyte cards by SanD<strong>is</strong>c.<br />

Modules<br />

MC+1-3<br />

57


Contact your DeTeWe d<strong>is</strong>tributor or<br />

local retailer if you want to purchase<br />

one of these cards.<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

In cascaded configurations, master<br />

and slave systems are connected<br />

via the PCM port (RJ45<br />

socket).<br />

In cascaded <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> configurations,<br />

the slave system requires<br />

an MC+1-3 central control<br />

module of its own.<br />

In cascaded <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> configurations,<br />

a CompactFlash card<br />

must be installed in the master<br />

system; it <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t necessary to install<br />

one of these cards in the<br />

slave system.<br />

for frame coding (PBX Cascading<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 98).<br />

■ The Ethernet port (10/100<br />

Mbits/s) can be used to connect<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> to the LAN.<br />

■<br />

The V.24-1 interface can be used<br />

to connect additional apparatus,<br />

e.g. a computer for analysing<br />

call charges.<br />

For information on the V.24 interface<br />

pin assignment, refer to<br />

COM Port starting on <strong>page</strong> 44.<br />

Indicators<br />

There are four LEDs on the front of<br />

the MC+1-3 central control module.<br />

■<br />

■<br />

In cascaded configurations, the<br />

central control modules use the<br />

PCMV interface to exchange system<br />

signals. The PCMV interface<br />

provides the system clock signals,<br />

access to the 16-Mbit/s<br />

PCM highway, and a 2-Mbit/s<br />

LAN.<br />

In cascaded configurations, the<br />

S1 and S2 DIP switches are used<br />

1<br />

2<br />

MC+1-3<br />

MC+1-3: LEDs<br />

3<br />

4<br />

The LEDs indicate the following:<br />

LED 1: Flashing yellow New software <strong>is</strong> being loaded onto an interface card<br />

(the corresponding interface card’s indicator will be<br />

constantly red).<br />

LED 2: Constantly green The central control module <strong>is</strong> operational (flickering<br />

<strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>rmal).<br />

Flashing green/yellow<br />

The system software (firmware) <strong>is</strong> starting up.<br />

58 MC+1-3 Modules


Flashing yellow<br />

The booter <strong>is</strong> reloading.<br />

Constantly yellow The system <strong>is</strong> booting.<br />

Constantly red<br />

System fault<br />

LED 3: – Not used<br />

LED 4: Constantly green An Ethernet connection has been establ<strong>is</strong>hed.<br />

Operational Information<br />

If you need to exchange the central<br />

control module, shut down the system<br />

first! The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> must be<br />

d<strong>is</strong>connected from the mains supply<br />

(see Installing the Central Control<br />

Module starting on <strong>page</strong> 23).<br />

Do <strong>no</strong>t pull the CompactFlash card<br />

during operation as th<strong>is</strong> may cause<br />

data to be lost!<br />

A MC+1-3 central control module installed<br />

in a master system provides<br />

the following central resources:<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

3 three-party conferences<br />

6 DTMF transmitters<br />

10 DTMF receivers<br />

1 Music On Hold<br />

32 HDLC controllers for RAS, ISP<br />

and DECT data.<br />

If the MC+1-3 central control module<br />

<strong>is</strong> removed from a cascaded PBX,<br />

the entire system will become i<strong>no</strong>perative.<br />

Modules<br />

MC+1-3<br />

59


MT+S2M1-1<br />

MT+S2M1-1<br />

S2M<br />

The MT+S2M1-1 interface card can<br />

be installed in any of the slots (1 to<br />

12) of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> (see Slots<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 22).<br />

Technical Information<br />

-42V<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

The MT+S2M1-1 interface card<br />

can also be installed in a slave<br />

system.<br />

A maximum of four MT+S2M1-1<br />

interface cards can be configured<br />

in the entire system.<br />

No settings need to be made on<br />

the MT+S2M1-1 interface card.<br />

The MT+S2M1-1 interface card<br />

runs on software acquired from<br />

the system. After the card has<br />

been installed it will automatically<br />

load the required software.<br />

MT+S2M1-1: Front view<br />

■ The maximum range <strong>is</strong> 300 m.<br />

Field of Application<br />

The MT+S2M1-1 interface card provides<br />

one ISDN S 2M interface for connecting<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> either to a<br />

primary rate access or to a second<br />

PBX (ISDN point-to-point connection).<br />

■<br />

The short-circuit-proof feed<br />

voltage <strong>is</strong> –42 V/7 W.<br />

60 MT+S2M1-1 Modules


Pin Assignment<br />

The following table shows the pin<br />

assignment for the RJ45 connector<br />

of the interface (labelled “S2M”; see<br />

the illustration MT+S2M1-1: Front<br />

view on <strong>page</strong> 60):<br />

Pin Number<br />

1 IN a<br />

2 IN b<br />

Assignment<br />

3 Not used<br />

4 OUT a<br />

5 OUT b<br />

6 Not used<br />

7 Not used<br />

8 Not used<br />

Indicators<br />

There are four LEDs on the front of<br />

the MT+S2M1-1 interface card.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

MT+S2M1-1<br />

S2M<br />

-42V<br />

3<br />

4<br />

MT+S2M1-1: LEDs<br />

The following table shows the pin<br />

assignment for the RJ45 connector<br />

of the power feed cable (labelled<br />

“–42 V”; see the illustration<br />

MT+S2M1-1: Front view on <strong>page</strong> 60):<br />

Pin Number<br />

Assignment<br />

1 Not used<br />

2 Not used<br />

3 –42 V<br />

4 0 V<br />

5 0 V<br />

6 –42 V<br />

7 Not used<br />

8 Not used<br />

Modules<br />

MT+S2M1-1<br />

61


The LEDs indicate the following:<br />

LED 1: Constantly yellow At least one connection establ<strong>is</strong>hed through the interface<br />

card <strong>is</strong> active.<br />

LED 2: Constantly green The interface card <strong>is</strong> operational; the slot has been<br />

activated (flickering <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>rmal).<br />

Flashing yellow<br />

Constantly red<br />

The interface card <strong>is</strong> ready, but the slot has <strong>no</strong>t been<br />

activated or the interface card has <strong>no</strong>t been configured<br />

yet.<br />

New software <strong>is</strong> being loaded onto the interface<br />

card. If the LED lights up red for an extended period<br />

of time, there may be a fault.<br />

LED 3: Constantly green The interface card <strong>is</strong> providing the system clock signal<br />

(indicated only in the master system and only on<br />

an interface card).<br />

LED 4: – Not used<br />

Operational Information<br />

The MT+S2M1-1 interface card can<br />

be exchanged during operation, i.e.<br />

without powering down the system.<br />

However, the slot must first be deactivated<br />

in the Configurator in the<br />

web console (see Installing Interface<br />

Cards starting on <strong>page</strong> 25).<br />

If the MT+S2M1-1 interface card <strong>is</strong><br />

being used in the master system of a<br />

cascaded configuration, it can provide<br />

the system clock signal. Unless<br />

otherw<strong>is</strong>e specified, the system automatically<br />

selects an S 2M card as<br />

the clock signal source. For further<br />

information, refer to PBX Cascading<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 98.<br />

62 MT+S2M1-1 Modules


MX+S01-8<br />

Field of Application<br />

The MX+S01-8 interface card provides<br />

eight 8 S 0 interfaces which can<br />

be used for either external connections,<br />

i.e. to connect the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> to a digital network<br />

(PSTN, Public Switch Telephony Network),<br />

or internal connections, i.e. to<br />

connect digital terminals (ISDN telephones,<br />

ISDN fax machines etc.) to<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

The MX+S01-8 interface card can be<br />

installed in any of the slots (1 to 12)<br />

of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> (see Slots starting<br />

on <strong>page</strong> 22).<br />

Technical Information<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

The MX+S01-8 interface card<br />

can also be installed in a slave<br />

system.<br />

DIP switches S1 to S16 can be<br />

used to activate a 100-ohm terminal<br />

res<strong>is</strong>tor (default: ON).<br />

For further information, refer to<br />

Termination starting on <strong>page</strong> 35.<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

The power failure circuit can be<br />

activated by means of DIP<br />

switches S17 to S20 (default:<br />

off). If activated, the system will<br />

connect the first S 0 interface<br />

with the eighth S 0 interface in<br />

the event of a power failure; provided<br />

the system has been configured<br />

accordingly, external<br />

calls can be made using an<br />

emergency telephone.<br />

For further information, refer to<br />

Power Failure starting on<br />

<strong>page</strong> 31.<br />

All eight S 0 interfaces can be<br />

configured either as subscriber<br />

(internal) interfaces or as trunk<br />

(external) interfaces.<br />

For further information, refer to<br />

S0 Ports starting on <strong>page</strong> 34.<br />

If the MX+S01-8 interface card <strong>is</strong><br />

being used in the master system<br />

of a cascaded configuration, it<br />

can provide the system clock signal.<br />

For further information, refer to<br />

PBX Networking starting on<br />

<strong>page</strong> 102.<br />

The MX+S01-8 interface card<br />

runs on software acquired from<br />

the system. After the card has<br />

been installed it will automatically<br />

load the required software.<br />

Pin Assignment<br />

For information on the S 0 interface<br />

pin assignment, refer to S0 Ports<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 34.<br />

Modules<br />

MX+S01-8<br />

63


Indicators<br />

There are four LEDs on the front of<br />

the MX+S01-8 interface card.<br />

MX+S01-8<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

S0 2<br />

S0 1<br />

MX+S01-8: LEDs<br />

The LEDs indicate the following:<br />

LED 1: Constantly yellow At least one connection establ<strong>is</strong>hed through the interface<br />

card <strong>is</strong> active.<br />

LED 2: Constantly green The interface card <strong>is</strong> operational; the slot has been<br />

activated (flickering <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>rmal).<br />

Flashing yellow<br />

Constantly red<br />

The interface card <strong>is</strong> ready, but the slot has <strong>no</strong>t been<br />

activated or the interface card has <strong>no</strong>t been configured<br />

yet.<br />

New software <strong>is</strong> being loaded onto the interface<br />

card. If the LED lights up red for an extended period<br />

of time, there may be a fault.<br />

LED 3: Constantly green The interface card <strong>is</strong> providing the system clock signal<br />

(indicated only in the master system and only on<br />

an interface card).<br />

LED 4: Constantly yellow The interface card <strong>is</strong> running a combination of subscriber<br />

and trunk connections, i.e. both internal and<br />

external S 0 interfaces have been configured.<br />

Operational Information<br />

The MX+S01-8 interface card can be<br />

exchanged during operation, i.e.<br />

without powering down the system.<br />

However, the slot must first be deactivated<br />

in the Configurator in the<br />

web console (see Installing Interface<br />

Cards starting on <strong>page</strong> 25).<br />

64 MX+S01-8 Modules


All three protocol layers can be individually<br />

configured as master or<br />

slave for each S 0 interface.<br />

The S 0 interfaces can be configured<br />

as DSS1-PP, DSS1-PMP or Q.SIG lines.<br />

MS+UPN1-8<br />

Field of Application<br />

The MS+UPN1-8 interface card provides<br />

eight U pn interfaces for connecting<br />

system terminals; however,<br />

it <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t possible to connect DECT<br />

base stations.<br />

The MS+UPN1-8 interface card can<br />

be installed in any of the slots (1 to<br />

12) of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> (see Slots<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 22).<br />

Technical Information<br />

■<br />

The MS+UPN1-8 interface card<br />

can also be installed in a slave<br />

system.<br />

Pin Assignment<br />

RJ45 Connector Pin Assignment for<br />

the MS+UPN1-8 Interface<br />

Pin Number<br />

Assignment<br />

1 Not used<br />

2 Not used<br />

3 Not used<br />

4 U pn a<br />

5 U pn b<br />

6 Not used<br />

7 Not used<br />

8 Not used<br />

■<br />

■<br />

No settings need to be made on<br />

the MS+UPN1-8 interface card.<br />

The MS+UPN1-8 interface card<br />

runs on software acquired from<br />

the system. After the card has<br />

been installed it will automatically<br />

load the required software.<br />

Indicators<br />

There are four LEDs on the front of<br />

the MS+UPN1-8 interface card.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

MS+UPN1-8<br />

3<br />

4<br />

UPN 2<br />

UPN 1<br />

MS+UPN1-8<br />

Modules<br />

MS+UPN1-8<br />

65


The LEDs indicate the following:<br />

LED 1: Constantly yellow At least one connection establ<strong>is</strong>hed through the interface<br />

card <strong>is</strong> active.<br />

LED 2: Constantly green The interface card <strong>is</strong> operational; the slot has been<br />

activated (flickering <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>rmal).<br />

Flashing yellow<br />

Constantly red<br />

LED 3: – Not used<br />

LED 4: – Not used<br />

The interface card <strong>is</strong> ready, but the slot has <strong>no</strong>t been<br />

activated or the interface card has <strong>no</strong>t been configured<br />

yet.<br />

New software <strong>is</strong> being loaded onto the interface<br />

card. If the LED lights up red for an extended period<br />

of time, there may be a fault.<br />

Operational Information<br />

The MS+UPN1-8 interface card can<br />

be exchanged during operation, i.e.<br />

without powering down the system.<br />

However, the slot must first be deactivated<br />

in the Configurator in the<br />

web console (see Installing Interface<br />

Cards starting on <strong>page</strong> 25).<br />

The short-circuit-proof feed voltage<br />

<strong>is</strong> –42 V.<br />

MS+UPN2-8<br />

Field of Application<br />

The MS+UPN2-8 interface card provides<br />

eight U pn interfaces for connecting<br />

system terminals and DECT<br />

base stations.<br />

Technical Information<br />

■<br />

The MS+UPN2-8 interface card<br />

can also be installed in a slave<br />

system.<br />

The MS+UPN2-8 interface card can<br />

be installed in any of the slots (1 to<br />

12) of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> (see Slots<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 22).<br />

■<br />

A maximum of 48 RFPs (Radio<br />

Fixed Parts, DECT base stations)<br />

can be connected to the entire<br />

system.<br />

66 MS+UPN2-8 Modules


■<br />

In order to connect RFPs, U pn<br />

ports 1+2, 3+4, 5+6 or 7+8 can<br />

be combined by setting the DIP<br />

switches on the card accordingly.<br />

For further information, refer to<br />

Upn Ports starting on <strong>page</strong> 38.<br />

Pin Assignment<br />

For information on the U pn interface<br />

pin assignment, refer to Upn Ports<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 38.<br />

Indicators<br />

There are four LEDs on the front of<br />

the MS+UPN2-8 interface card.<br />

■<br />

The MS+UPN2-8 interface card<br />

runs on software acquired from<br />

the system. After the card has<br />

been installed it will automatically<br />

load the required software.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

MS+UPN2-8<br />

3<br />

4<br />

UPN 2<br />

UPN 1<br />

MS+UPN2-8<br />

The LEDs indicate the following:<br />

LED 1: Constantly yellow At least one connection establ<strong>is</strong>hed through the interface<br />

card <strong>is</strong> active.<br />

LED 2: Constantly green The interface card <strong>is</strong> operational; the slot has been<br />

activated (flickering <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>rmal).<br />

Flashing yellow<br />

Constantly red<br />

LED 3: – Not used<br />

LED 4: – Not used<br />

The interface card <strong>is</strong> ready, but the slot has <strong>no</strong>t been<br />

activated or the interface card has <strong>no</strong>t been configured<br />

yet.<br />

New software <strong>is</strong> being loaded onto the interface<br />

card. If the LED lights up red for an extended period<br />

of time, there may be a fault.<br />

Modules<br />

MS+UPN2-8<br />

67


Operational Information<br />

The MS+UPN2-8 interface card can<br />

be exchanged during operation, i.e.<br />

without powering down the system.<br />

However, the slot must first be deactivated<br />

in the Configurator in the<br />

web console (see Installing Interface<br />

Cards starting on <strong>page</strong> 25).<br />

DECT base stations can be connected<br />

only if the interface card has been<br />

installed in the master system of a<br />

cascaded configuration.<br />

MS+A1-8<br />

Field of Application<br />

The MS+A1-8 interface card provides<br />

eight analogue interfaces for<br />

connecting analogue terminals.<br />

The MS+A1-8 interface card can be<br />

installed in any of the slots (1 to 12)<br />

of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> (see Slots starting<br />

on <strong>page</strong> 22).<br />

■<br />

■<br />

The consultation feature can be<br />

selected by means of a flash key<br />

and/or earthing key.<br />

The MS+A1-8 interface card<br />

runs on software acquired from<br />

the system. After the card has<br />

been installed it will automatically<br />

load the required software.<br />

Technical Information<br />

■<br />

■<br />

The MS+A1-8 interface card can<br />

also be installed in a slave system.<br />

The MS+A1-8 interface card<br />

supports pulse dialling as well as<br />

dual-tone multi-frequency<br />

(DTMF) dialling. The central receivers<br />

of the MC+1-3 interface<br />

card are used for DTMF recognition.<br />

■<br />

No settings need to be made on<br />

the MS+A1-8 interface card.<br />

Pin Assignment<br />

For information on the a/b interface<br />

pin assignment, refer to a/b Ports<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 40.<br />

Indicators<br />

There are four LEDs on the front of<br />

the MS+A1-8 interface card.<br />

■<br />

Calling line identification presentation<br />

(CLIP) <strong>is</strong> supported.<br />

68 MS+A1-8 Modules


MS+A1-8<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

a/b 2<br />

a/b 1<br />

MS+A1-8<br />

The LEDs indicate the following:<br />

LED 1: Constantly yellow At least one connection establ<strong>is</strong>hed through the interface<br />

card <strong>is</strong> active.<br />

LED 2: Constantly green The interface card <strong>is</strong> operational; the slot has been<br />

activated (flickering <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>rmal).<br />

Flashing yellow<br />

Constantly red<br />

LED 3: – Not used<br />

LED 4: – Not used<br />

The interface card <strong>is</strong> ready, but the slot has <strong>no</strong>t been<br />

activated or the interface card has <strong>no</strong>t been configured<br />

yet.<br />

New software <strong>is</strong> being loaded onto the interface<br />

card. If the LED lights up red for an extended period<br />

of time, there may be a fault.<br />

Operational Information<br />

The MS+A1-8 interface card can be<br />

exchanged during operation, i.e.<br />

without powering down the system.<br />

However, the slot must first be deactivated<br />

in the Configurator in the<br />

web console (see Installing Interface<br />

Cards starting on <strong>page</strong> 25).<br />

Modules<br />

MS+A1-8<br />

69


Configuration<br />

Configuration and programming of<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> performed by<br />

the Configurator, a special software<br />

application integrated into the system.<br />

The Configurator <strong>is</strong> operated<br />

via the Web console, which can be<br />

run on any PC connected to the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> Web console<br />

Using the Web console, you can:<br />

■<br />

■<br />

perform the initial configuration<br />

of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>,<br />

configure users of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> and author<strong>is</strong>e<br />

them to use certain system services,<br />

■<br />

access the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> telephone<br />

book.<br />

The Web console has an integrated<br />

online help function that offers comprehensive<br />

information on configuration<br />

and maintenance of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> (see Loading the Online<br />

Help starting on <strong>page</strong> 81).<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

carry out further<br />

system maintenance,<br />

use PC-supported telephony<br />

functions,<br />

read out call charge information,<br />

Note: In order to use all the new<br />

system software functions, we recommend<br />

that you download the latest<br />

software from our Web site at<br />

http://www.detewe.com.<br />

For the initial configuration you can<br />

connect the PC to the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

70 Configuration


via the Ethernet port. A COM port<br />

can also be used. The TCP/IP network<br />

protocol <strong>is</strong> used to set up a connection<br />

via one of these ports. You can<br />

then open the Web console of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> and call up the Configurator<br />

from there.<br />

Note: <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> chapter describes initial<br />

configuration of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

For day-to-day operation you can integrate<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> into a LAN<br />

and start the Configurator from any<br />

PC. For information on how to do th<strong>is</strong>,<br />

refer to the Configuration Examples<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 86.<br />

Brief Guide to Initial Configuration<br />

Setting up a first connection <strong>is</strong> quite<br />

simple with a standard Windows PC:<br />

1. Turn off the PC. Remove all connected<br />

network cables.<br />

2. Connect the PC network card to<br />

the LAN port. Use a cross-wired<br />

Ethernet cable to do th<strong>is</strong>.<br />

3. Restart the PC. If you manually<br />

deactivated the automatic configuration<br />

of the network card<br />

via DHCP, you must reactivate<br />

th<strong>is</strong> and again restart the computer.<br />

4. Start the Web browser. In the<br />

address field, enter<br />

“http://192.168.99.254/”.<br />

The login <strong>page</strong> of the Web console<br />

will then open. For further details,<br />

please refer to Configuring the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> starting on <strong>page</strong> 79.<br />

First Configuration via<br />

Serial Port<br />

1. The serial port can also be used<br />

as alternative access for the first<br />

configuration.Additionally, you<br />

require a crossed serial line<br />

(“null modem”).Install the “occonfig”<br />

program from the system<br />

CD. To do th<strong>is</strong>, you must log<br />

on as an admin<strong>is</strong>trator under<br />

Windows NT or Windows 2000/<br />

XP.<br />

2. Shut down the PC. Remove all<br />

connected network leads. Connect<br />

the serial port of the PC to<br />

the COM port of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

3. Restart the PC. Set up an RAS<br />

link with the icon configured on<br />

the desktop under step 1. Enter<br />

“Admin<strong>is</strong>trator” without a password<br />

as your user name.<br />

Configuration<br />

Brief Guide to Initial Configuration<br />

71


4. Start the Web browser. Enter<br />

“http://192.168.99.254/” in the<br />

address box.<br />

You will see the log-on <strong>page</strong> of the<br />

Web console. Continue reading under<br />

Configuring the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 79.<br />

System Requirements<br />

Note: If <strong>no</strong> connection can be establ<strong>is</strong>hed<br />

by following the instructions<br />

in the Brief Guide to Initial Configuration<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 71, refer<br />

to the more detailed explanations below.<br />

A <strong>no</strong>rmal TCP/IP-capable PC with a<br />

Web browser <strong>is</strong> required for the initial<br />

configuration. The PC should at<br />

least meet the following requirements:<br />

■<br />

IBM-compatible 200 MHz PC<br />

system. If required, a Web browser<br />

can be installed from the system CD<br />

delivered with the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

In addition, the selected type of connection<br />

requires further system<br />

components that you may have to<br />

install on your PC. The driver software<br />

<strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>rmally supplied with the<br />

hardware, and the appropriate version<br />

should be available for your operating<br />

system. You will find the system<br />

software on the installation CD<br />

of your operating system.<br />

■<br />

32 MB RAM and 50 MB of free<br />

hard d<strong>is</strong>k space<br />

For connection on the V.24 port<br />

(COM port) you need:<br />

■ Microsoft Windows 95/98,<br />

Microsoft Windows 2000/XP or<br />

Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 operating<br />

system<br />

■<br />

Microsoft Internet Explorer version<br />

4.0 or higher, or Netscape<br />

Communicator version 4.5 or<br />

higher<br />

Note: Microsoft Internet Explorer <strong>is</strong><br />

already installed in current versions<br />

of the Microsoft Windows operating<br />

■<br />

■<br />

Hardware: one free serial port<br />

(RS-232, V.24) and a serial cable<br />

(SUBD9). System software: serial<br />

port driver and TCP/IP protocol<br />

software<br />

Driver software: RAS adapter<br />

software for installation on the<br />

service PC (<strong>is</strong> included on the<br />

CD)<br />

For connection by network card you<br />

need:<br />

72 System Requirements Configuration


■<br />

Hardware: network card with<br />

10BaseT port and RJ-45 network<br />

cable (crossover tw<strong>is</strong>ted pairs or<br />

connection via a hub)<br />

■<br />

Software: network card driver<br />

and TCP/IP protocol software<br />

Configuration under Windows<br />

Before beginning initial configuration,<br />

install the necessary hardware<br />

and matching driver software on the<br />

PC. Follow the installation instructions<br />

supplied with the hardware. In<br />

many cases, the TCP/IP system software<br />

<strong>is</strong> installed together with the<br />

driver software for the hardware.<br />

When you have installed the driver<br />

software, proceed as follows:<br />

Note: The following steps are <strong>no</strong>t<br />

necessary under Windows 2000/XP. If<br />

possible, use a network card connection<br />

as network cards are easier to<br />

configure and feature higher data<br />

transfer rates. For more information<br />

please read Connection by Network<br />

Card (LAN) starting on <strong>page</strong> 75<br />

1. Open “Network Settings” in the<br />

Control Panel of your PC. To do<br />

th<strong>is</strong>, you select the item “Settings<br />

> Control Panel” from the<br />

Start menu and double-click on<br />

the “Network” icon. Under Windows<br />

NT, select the “Protocols”<br />

tab.<br />

2. Check the l<strong>is</strong>t of installed components<br />

to see whether the TCP/<br />

IP protocol <strong>is</strong> present. If necessary,<br />

install TCP/IP by clicking on<br />

the “Add” button.<br />

3. Select “TCP/IP” from the “Protocol/Microsoft”<br />

folder and confirm<br />

your entry with “OK”.<br />

4. Then follow the installation instructions<br />

d<strong>is</strong>played.<br />

Depending on the type of connection<br />

(network card or V.24) you select,<br />

<strong>no</strong>te the following when installing<br />

the driver and system software.<br />

Connection on Serial Port<br />

(V.24)<br />

The required components are <strong>no</strong>rmally<br />

ready installed together with<br />

the operating system. In th<strong>is</strong> case,<br />

you can easily configure the connection<br />

to the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> by using<br />

the program “occonfig”:<br />

Note: Under Windows NT or Windows<br />

2000/XP you must log on as an<br />

admin<strong>is</strong>trator.<br />

Configuration<br />

Configuration under Windows<br />

73


1. Insert the system CD supplied<br />

along with the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

The CD starts automatically if<br />

your PC <strong>is</strong> configured accordingly.<br />

Otherw<strong>is</strong>e select “Run” in<br />

the Start menu. Use the<br />

“Browse” button to find the<br />

“cd_start.exe” program on the<br />

CD. Confirm your entry with<br />

“Open” and “OK”.<br />

2. Select the “Software, installation<br />

program for RAS network link”<br />

option from the start mask. Click<br />

on “OK” to install the modem<br />

driver.<br />

3. In the dialogue that follows, select<br />

a serial port and confirm th<strong>is</strong><br />

with “OK”.<br />

After restarting your computer, you<br />

will find an icon for the connection<br />

to the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> on your desktop.<br />

Note: If th<strong>is</strong> procedure can<strong>no</strong>t be<br />

completed properly, refer to the section<br />

entitled Notes on Configuring the<br />

Serial Port on <strong>page</strong> 75.<br />

Establ<strong>is</strong>hing a Remote Data<br />

Transfer Connection<br />

1. Connect the serial port of the PC<br />

to the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> COM port.<br />

You will require a suitable connector<br />

cable.<br />

2. Double-click on the <strong>OpenCom</strong><br />

desktop icon created with the<br />

“occonfig” program.<br />

3. In the dialogue which follows,<br />

enter the user name and password<br />

<strong>valid</strong> for the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

user account being used. For the<br />

initial configuration, log on under<br />

the user name “Admin<strong>is</strong>trator”<br />

without giving a password.<br />

Clear any entries in the “Domain”<br />

box and confirm th<strong>is</strong> with<br />

“OK”.<br />

When the connection <strong>is</strong> establ<strong>is</strong>hed,<br />

all necessary IP address<br />

parameters will be transmitted<br />

by the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> using the<br />

PPP protocol and automatically<br />

set for the direct PC link.<br />

4. Once set-up of the connection <strong>is</strong><br />

confirmed, you can continue<br />

with Testing the Setup starting<br />

on <strong>page</strong> 76.<br />

Note: It <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t possible to operate a<br />

network card and a remote data<br />

transfer connection for the same network<br />

address range simultaneously.<br />

For th<strong>is</strong> reason you must temporarily<br />

deactivate the network card when<br />

you want to establ<strong>is</strong>h a remote data<br />

transfer connection. To do th<strong>is</strong>, open<br />

the “System” icon in the Control Panel<br />

and deactivate the network card in<br />

the “Devices” tab. If the PC <strong>is</strong> configured<br />

via DHCP, you can instead also<br />

d<strong>is</strong>connect the PC from the LAN and<br />

reboot it.<br />

74 Configuration under Windows Configuration


Notes on Configuring the<br />

Serial Port<br />

A serial port <strong>is</strong> automatically detected<br />

when the PC boots and the<br />

corresponding system software <strong>is</strong> installed.<br />

The TCP/IP connection to the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> establ<strong>is</strong>hed by<br />

means of additional system software:<br />

the RAS adapter software and<br />

the serial port driver.<br />

Tip: The serial port that you use <strong>is</strong><br />

operated with the parameters<br />

57,600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit,<br />

<strong>no</strong> parity and <strong>no</strong> hardware data flow<br />

control.<br />

Note: The RAS network <strong>is</strong> always<br />

installed under Windows 2000/XP<br />

and can<strong>no</strong>t be uninstalled. The following<br />

section <strong>is</strong> only relevant for users<br />

of old Windows versions.<br />

Installing the RAS Network under<br />

Windows 95 or Windows 98<br />

1. Open the Control Panel and double-click<br />

on the “Software” icon.<br />

2. Click on the “Windows Setup”<br />

tab and double-click on the item<br />

“Communications”.<br />

3. Tick the check box next to the<br />

component “RAS Network” and<br />

confirm your entry with “OK”.<br />

Installing the RAS under<br />

Windows NT 4.0<br />

1. Open the Control Panel and double-click<br />

on the “Network” icon.<br />

2. Select the “Services” tab and<br />

click on the “Add” button.<br />

3. Select “Remote Access Service”<br />

from the l<strong>is</strong>t and confirm with<br />

“OK”.<br />

4. To conclude installation of the<br />

RAS, the RAS “Properties” dialogue<br />

<strong>is</strong> d<strong>is</strong>played. Select the<br />

driver “<strong>OpenCom</strong> Modem” that<br />

was created on the first start of<br />

the program “occonfig” and confirm<br />

th<strong>is</strong> with “OK”.<br />

5. Confirm the configuration with<br />

the “Continue” button and close<br />

the network settings.<br />

Note: If you have installed an operating<br />

system update earlier (Service<br />

Pack), install th<strong>is</strong> again after installation<br />

of the RAS.<br />

Connection by Network<br />

Card (LAN)<br />

First-time configuration of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> also possible by a<br />

network card, providing th<strong>is</strong> <strong>is</strong> already<br />

installed on the PC, of course.<br />

When the driver software for a network<br />

card <strong>is</strong> installed, the necessary<br />

Configuration<br />

Configuration under Windows<br />

75


system software for the TCP/IP protocol<br />

<strong>is</strong> installed at the same time.<br />

During th<strong>is</strong> process you should activate<br />

the automatic assignment of IP<br />

addresses by the DHCP protocol.<br />

If the PC has been operating in a network<br />

to date, you should activate the<br />

automatic assignment of an IP address.<br />

1. To do th<strong>is</strong>, you select “Settings ><br />

Control Panel” in the Start<br />

menu. Double-click on the “Network”<br />

icon. Under Windows NT<br />

select the “Protocols” tab. Under<br />

Windows 2000/XP right click<br />

on the “LAN Link” icon. Select<br />

“Properties”.<br />

2. Double-click on the item “TCP/IP<br />

Protocol > Network card”. Activate<br />

the option “Obtain an IP address<br />

from a DHCP server” in the<br />

“Properties” dialogue. Gateway<br />

or DNS entries must be deactivated.<br />

Note: Changes to the Gateway and<br />

the DNS configuration are made by<br />

DHCP.<br />

Establ<strong>is</strong>hing a Network<br />

Connection<br />

1. Connect the PC network card to<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> network port.<br />

To do th<strong>is</strong>, use either a crossover<br />

tw<strong>is</strong>ted-pair network cable or<br />

connect the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> via a<br />

hub.<br />

Note: For initial configuration, it<br />

may be w<strong>is</strong>e <strong>no</strong>t to connect the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> to an ex<strong>is</strong>ting LAN in<br />

order to eliminate conflicts with an<br />

ex<strong>is</strong>ting DHCP server.<br />

2. Restart your PC. During the system<br />

start, all necessary IP address<br />

parameters will be transmitted<br />

by <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> via<br />

DHCP and automatically set for<br />

the network card.<br />

Note: If the PC has been operating<br />

under Windows NT in a network with<br />

a Windows NT domain, you will <strong>no</strong>t<br />

be able to log on to the domain. So<br />

log on to the PC domain as the local<br />

user “Admin<strong>is</strong>trator”.<br />

3. Continue reading under Testing<br />

the Setup starting on <strong>page</strong> 76.<br />

Testing the Setup<br />

Subsequent to establ<strong>is</strong>hment, test<br />

the TCP/IP connection between the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> and the PC.<br />

1. Select the item “Run” in the<br />

Start menu. Enter the command<br />

“ping host.domain” or<br />

“ping 192.168.99.254” in the<br />

“Open” box.<br />

2. Confirm th<strong>is</strong> with “OK”.<br />

Tip: To find the IP address of the<br />

Web console, enter *182<br />

on a connected system telephone.<br />

76 Configuration under Windows Configuration


*183 will also show you<br />

the network mask.<br />

You can test the correct IP configuration<br />

under Windows 95 and Windows<br />

98. Select the item “Run” in<br />

the Start menu. Enter the command<br />

“winipcfg” in the “Open” box. Confirm<br />

th<strong>is</strong> with “OK”. Select the network<br />

adapter used for connection to<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. The IP addresses<br />

assigned by the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> on establ<strong>is</strong>hment<br />

of the connection will<br />

be d<strong>is</strong>played.<br />

Under Windows NT4, 2000 and XP<br />

you can check the IP configuration<br />

by entering the commands “ipconfig<br />

-all” or “route print” in the command<br />

prompt. The command “arp -a” produces<br />

a l<strong>is</strong>t of assigned IP addresses<br />

for LAN links.<br />

Starting the Browser<br />

Start the installed Web browser.<br />

When you start the Microsoft Internet<br />

Explorer for the first time, the Internet<br />

access wizard will automatically<br />

appear. Select the option “Use<br />

ex<strong>is</strong>ting account” and confirm th<strong>is</strong><br />

with “OK”.<br />

If the PC has been operating in a network<br />

or used for Internet access, it <strong>is</strong><br />

possible that access may be configured<br />

indirect via a proxy server. Deactivate<br />

access via a proxy server<br />

(“Direct connection”). To do th<strong>is</strong> in<br />

the Internet Explorer, open the Internet<br />

options in the menu “Tools > Internet<br />

Options”, then select the<br />

“Connections” tab. In Netscape Communicator,<br />

you select the command<br />

“Edit > Settings” and then select the<br />

section “Extended > Proxies” under<br />

“Category”.<br />

Note: Reset your browser’s options<br />

for the call-up of <strong>page</strong>s to their default<br />

settings specified on initial installation<br />

of the browser.<br />

Configuration for Linux and MacOS<br />

All modern operating systems support<br />

the TCP/IP protocol. You can<br />

find detailed information on setting<br />

up hardware and software for the<br />

Windows operating systems under<br />

Configuration under Windows starting<br />

on <strong>page</strong> 73. In th<strong>is</strong> section there<br />

are tips on integrating Linux and<br />

MacOS operating systems.<br />

Linux<br />

The Linux network configuration <strong>is</strong><br />

usually performed by the set-up program<br />

with which you install a Linux<br />

d<strong>is</strong>tribution. After installation, you<br />

will see a series of “How To's”. In<br />

“Linux NET-3-HowTo” and “DHCP<br />

Configuration<br />

Configuration for Linux and MacOS<br />

77


Mini-HowTo” you will find instructions<br />

on TCP/IP configuration.<br />

For the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> to configure<br />

the TCP/IP settings of a Linux system<br />

via DHCP, you must also install the<br />

“dhclient” package and activate configuration<br />

via DHCP in the Linux network<br />

configuration. To access the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> Configurator, you<br />

should also install Netscape Communicator<br />

4.5 (or higher).<br />

MacOS<br />

The TCP/IP protocol <strong>is</strong> already integrated<br />

in the new MacOS starting<br />

with version 7.6. For the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> to configure the TCP/<br />

IP settings of a MacOS system via<br />

DHCP, you must set the configuration<br />

method to “DHCP Server” in the<br />

menu “Control Panels TCP/IP”.<br />

To access the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> Configurator,<br />

you should also install Netscape<br />

Communicator 4.5 (or higher)<br />

or Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.5 (or<br />

higher).<br />

78 Configuration for Linux and MacOS Configuration


Configuring the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

Preparing the<br />

Configuration<br />

Before starting with the configuration,<br />

make sure you have the following<br />

documents at hand:<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

An overview of the ports<br />

A l<strong>is</strong>t of the terminals to be connected<br />

A l<strong>is</strong>t of the IPEIs, if you w<strong>is</strong>h to<br />

log on DECT terminals in the secure<br />

procedure<br />

A l<strong>is</strong>t of the users to be set up<br />

(staff entitled to use the services<br />

of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>) with their<br />

names, departments, and the internal<br />

call numbers you want to<br />

allocate to them<br />

For Internet access: the Internet<br />

service provider access data.<br />

Data <strong>no</strong>t available for first-time configuration<br />

can be updated or corrected<br />

at a later date.<br />

Starting the Web Console<br />

1. Start your Web browser. Enter<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> IP address in<br />

the “Address” box:<br />

http://192.168.99.254/.<br />

If the configuration PC gets its IP<br />

address automatically from the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> or if the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> entered as the<br />

domain name server, you can<br />

also start the Web console by<br />

entering the DNS name. The<br />

DNS name in the factory setting<br />

<strong>is</strong> host.domain. You can change<br />

th<strong>is</strong> in the Configurator (NET<br />

Configuration: Easy Access<br />

menu).<br />

2. The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> Web console<br />

<strong>is</strong> started. First set the country in<br />

which you are operating the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>, and in which language<br />

the Web console <strong>is</strong> to be<br />

d<strong>is</strong>played.<br />

Note: Use the Configuration Guide<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 137. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> will ass<strong>is</strong>t<br />

you in making the settings in the correct<br />

sequence.<br />

Configuration Configuring the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

79


<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>: log-on dialogue box<br />

3. To commence configuration, you<br />

must first log on. For the initial<br />

configuration, enter your:<br />

- user name: “Admin<strong>is</strong>trator”<br />

- password: for the initial configuration,<br />

leave th<strong>is</strong> box blank.<br />

4. Confirm th<strong>is</strong> by clicking on OK.<br />

<strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> puts all connected terminals<br />

into the “Guest” user group<br />

with restricted user rights. In<br />

th<strong>is</strong> way you prevent international<br />

external calls from the terminals,<br />

for example, while you<br />

are configuring the<br />

100<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> and the users.<br />

80 Configuring the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> Configuration


<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>: dialogue box for initial access<br />

5. The software opens a dialogue<br />

for initial access. Determine an<br />

admin<strong>is</strong>trator password and enter<br />

it in th<strong>is</strong> dialogue.<br />

6. Confirm your input with Apply.<br />

7. Click on the Configurator button<br />

on the home <strong>page</strong>.<br />

You will find <strong>no</strong>tes on using the Configurator<br />

and in the online help.<br />

Click on Help in the menu bar or<br />

click on TOC to activate an overview<br />

of help topics.<br />

Loading the Online Help<br />

The online help can <strong>no</strong>w be loaded<br />

in the Configurator:<br />

1. Go to the SYS Configuration:<br />

Components menu. Select the<br />

entry Online Help and click on<br />

Browse.<br />

2. Look for one of the languagespecific<br />

ZIP files in the OLH directory<br />

of the set-up CD. Confirm<br />

your choice by clicking on Open.<br />

3. Then click on Load to transfer<br />

the online help to the system.<br />

Configuration Configuring the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

81


Please <strong>no</strong>te: After completion of<br />

the loading operation, the system will<br />

take a few minutes to analyse the<br />

transferred file.<br />

Note: You can downed the latest<br />

version of the online help from<br />

http://www.detewe.de/.<br />

Fin<strong>is</strong>hing the<br />

Configuration<br />

1. When you have completed all<br />

the settings in the Configurator,<br />

you must save the configuration<br />

(see also Saving and Loading the<br />

Configuration on <strong>page</strong> 84).<br />

2. Then select the Log-off command<br />

in the upper menu bar.<br />

Preconfiguration<br />

Configuration of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

can be prepared at your DeTeWe<br />

Customer Service Centre or by an author<strong>is</strong>ed<br />

DeTeWe dealer. For th<strong>is</strong> purpose,<br />

a <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> installed here<br />

<strong>is</strong> programmed with the customer<br />

data (e.g. user data, call d<strong>is</strong>tribution<br />

schemes, cord-bound terminals).<br />

<strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> data <strong>is</strong> stored and then loaded<br />

into the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> at the customer’s<br />

site by a service technician.<br />

<strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> prepared configuration must be<br />

completed at the customer’s site<br />

(LAN configuration and DECT terminals).<br />

For configuration of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> Internet functions,<br />

first ask the responsible system admin<strong>is</strong>trator<br />

for details of the customer’s<br />

LAN prerequ<strong>is</strong>ites.<br />

Remote Configuration<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> configuration can<br />

also be altered or updated remotely<br />

by a customer service centre or author<strong>is</strong>ed<br />

dealer. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> requires activation<br />

of internal RAS access in the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> for the customer service<br />

centre/author<strong>is</strong>ed dealer.<br />

Note: If one or more MSNs are entered<br />

on the PBX Configuration: System:<br />

Remote service menu <strong>page</strong> in<br />

the Configurator and the Status option<br />

<strong>is</strong> activated, remote configuration<br />

access <strong>is</strong> then activated when a<br />

data call from one of the entered<br />

MSNs <strong>is</strong> reg<strong>is</strong>tered.<br />

The customer service centre/author<strong>is</strong>ed<br />

dealer can then log into the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> as an admin<strong>is</strong>trator:<br />

■<br />

■<br />

User name: “Admin<strong>is</strong>trator”<br />

Password: admin<strong>is</strong>trator password<br />

Note: If you do <strong>no</strong>t w<strong>is</strong>h to let the<br />

customer service centre/author<strong>is</strong>ed<br />

dealer k<strong>no</strong>w the admin<strong>is</strong>trator password,<br />

you can define a temporary<br />

password for remote configuration<br />

with at least five digits.<br />

82 Configuring the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> Configuration


Use the following code digit procedure<br />

on a standard terminal or a system<br />

telephone to activate internal<br />

remote maintenance access for the<br />

service centre/author<strong>is</strong>ed dealer:<br />

Remote configuration on (log-on<br />

with admin<strong>is</strong>trator password)<br />

H * 1 9 *<br />

Z (system PIN) #<br />

Remote configuration on (log-on<br />

with temporary password)<br />

H * 1 9 * Z (system PIN)<br />

* Z (temporary password) #<br />

Remote configuration off<br />

H # 1 9 #<br />

Activation <strong>is</strong> automatically cancelled<br />

30 minutes after the last configuration<br />

activity.<br />

Note: During remote configuration,<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> blocked for<br />

RAS access by any further users.<br />

Please <strong>no</strong>te: The system PIN <strong>is</strong><br />

preset to “0000” and it <strong>is</strong> absolutely<br />

imperative that the system admin<strong>is</strong>trator<br />

changes it to prevent undesirable<br />

remote maintenance.<br />

Using remote configuration, all<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> settings with the exception<br />

of the system PIN can be edited<br />

or updated. New software versions<br />

of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> and the<br />

software for the connected system<br />

terminals and base stations can also<br />

be installed (see the SYS Configuration:<br />

Firmware menu in the Configurator).<br />

For security reasons, settings in the<br />

Configurator, Net Configuration<br />

should only be edited on site to<br />

avoid malfunctions or failures in the<br />

customer’s LAN (e.g. due to IP address<br />

conflicts). Refer to the chapter<br />

entitled Configuration Examples<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 86, where interaction<br />

between the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> and<br />

a LAN <strong>is</strong> explained.<br />

Codes for IP<br />

Configuration<br />

The IP configuration of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> performed on the<br />

Web console in the Configurator, in<br />

the NET Configuration: Easy Access<br />

menu.<br />

In the event that the IP configuration<br />

of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> has to be<br />

changed and access via the Web<br />

console <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t possible, you can also<br />

use a code digit procedure to change<br />

these basic settings. Entry can be<br />

made from an analogue telephone,<br />

an ISDN telephone and from system<br />

telephones.<br />

Ask your system admin<strong>is</strong>trator for<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> system PIN. The<br />

factory setting <strong>is</strong> “0000”.<br />

Configuration Configuring the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

83


Set IP address<br />

H *182 Z (system PIN)<br />

* Z (www) * Z (xxx) *<br />

Z (yyy) * Z (zzz) #<br />

Set NET mask<br />

H *183 Z (system PIN)<br />

* Z (www) * Z (xxx) *<br />

Z (yyy) * Z (zzz) #<br />

Restart<br />

H * 1 8 5<br />

Z (system PIN) #<br />

Saving and Loading the<br />

Configuration<br />

Configurations are saved in a file archive<br />

and can be loaded to the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> either locally from a<br />

connected configuration PC, or by<br />

remote configuration.<br />

The following configuration and customer<br />

data can be saved and loaded<br />

again:<br />

Loading SW Updates<br />

New versions of the system and terminal<br />

software can be loaded to the<br />

system.<br />

New software versions of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> are loaded from the<br />

configuration PC, which accesses the<br />

Configurator (see the SYS Configuration:<br />

Firmware menu). For information<br />

on connecting a configuration<br />

PC, see Brief Guide to Initial<br />

Configuration on <strong>page</strong> 71.<br />

The terminal software <strong>is</strong> part of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> software and <strong>is</strong> automatically<br />

loaded into the terminals<br />

via the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> if the software<br />

version in the terminal <strong>is</strong> different<br />

from the terminal software stored in<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

Note: If you are operating an PBX<br />

cascade, new system software <strong>is</strong> automatically<br />

transferred to the slave<br />

system from the master system.<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

Telephony and network parameters<br />

User data<br />

Telephone book entries<br />

LCR tables<br />

For further information, refer to the<br />

online help documentation under<br />

the item SYS Configuration:<br />

Firmware.<br />

Resetting the System<br />

Data<br />

For further information, refer to the<br />

online help documentation under<br />

the topic SYS Configuration: Data<br />

backup.<br />

You can restore the factory settings<br />

of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> in the Configurator.<br />

84 Configuring the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> Configuration


Please <strong>no</strong>te: If th<strong>is</strong> <strong>is</strong> done, all individual<br />

settings and the user data<br />

are then lost. For th<strong>is</strong> reason, you<br />

should back up your configuration<br />

regularly, the best time being after<br />

every change. For details, refer to the<br />

chapter entitled Saving and Loading<br />

the Configuration starting on <strong>page</strong> 84<br />

and to the Web console online help.<br />

Proceed as follows:<br />

1. In the Configurator, call up the<br />

SYS Configuration: Restart<br />

menu.<br />

2. Click on Restart with Defaults.<br />

3. Confirm th<strong>is</strong> by pressing “OK”<br />

when the query dialogue box<br />

opens.<br />

Generating Your Own<br />

MoH Files<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> comes with an internal<br />

MoH file for Music on Hold.<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> product CD contains<br />

a number of MoH files with different<br />

volume levels, which you can<br />

load at a later time as necessary.<br />

own MoH file. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> program <strong>is</strong> usually<br />

located in the Windows directory<br />

called “Multimedia”.<br />

The MoH file must be coded with<br />

8000 Hz, 8 bit mo<strong>no</strong> in accordance<br />

with CCITT, A-Law. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> coding <strong>is</strong> required<br />

for the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> and can<br />

be set in the “Sound Recorder” when<br />

you save the file under Format<br />

(CCITT, A-Law) and Attributes (8000<br />

Hz, 8 bit mo<strong>no</strong>).<br />

Note: If you don't have the Sound<br />

Recorder program or the appropriate<br />

codec on your Windows operating<br />

system, you should install these components<br />

from your Windows CD.<br />

Load your MoH file in the Web console's<br />

Configurator, in the SYS Configuration:<br />

Components menu.<br />

Note: When generating your own<br />

MoH file, you may incur a fee for the<br />

use of <strong>no</strong>n-resident melodies (e.g. a<br />

GEMA fee in Germany or MCPS fee in<br />

the UK). The MoH files that come with<br />

your <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> can be used free<br />

of charge.<br />

The file format for <strong>no</strong>n-resident Music<br />

on Hold <strong>is</strong> *.wav. You can also<br />

save your own MoH in a *.wav file<br />

and load it into the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

If you have a Windows operating<br />

system, you can use the “Sound Recorder”<br />

program to generate your<br />

Configuration Configuring the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

85


Configuration Examples<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> in Computer Networks<br />

One of the outstanding features of<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> the integration<br />

of telephony and computer networks.<br />

Connect the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

via a computer network (LAN) with<br />

suitably configured workstations,<br />

and you can use its network features<br />

from these workstations. Using a<br />

Web browser you can access:<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> Configurator<br />

call charge admin<strong>is</strong>tration<br />

the OpenCTI 50, with which telephone<br />

functions can be used on<br />

a PC<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> central telephone<br />

book and your personal<br />

telephone book as well as to the<br />

company telephone book (if the<br />

multi-company variant <strong>is</strong> activated).<br />

In addition, the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> can<br />

be used as an Internet access server.<br />

RAS access can also be implemented<br />

using the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>, which enables<br />

the integration of external staff<br />

in the LAN.<br />

In th<strong>is</strong> chapter you will find several<br />

examples of configurations showing<br />

integration of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> in a<br />

LAN. Which example applies to your<br />

situation depends on the size and<br />

properties of the ex<strong>is</strong>ting or planned<br />

LAN infrastructure.<br />

The following LAN prerequ<strong>is</strong>ites are<br />

possible:<br />

Server configuration in the LAN<br />

No IP server present<br />

IP server present<br />

DHCP server present<br />

IP server present<br />

No DHCP server present<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> Functions<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> functions automatically as DHCP and<br />

DNS server<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> functions automatically as DHCP<br />

client<br />

System Admin<strong>is</strong>trator must assign IP address and<br />

DNS name for <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

Special case when integrating the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> in<br />

a LAN; settings in the “NET Configuration: Easy<br />

Access” menu must be coordinated with the responsible<br />

system admin<strong>is</strong>trator<br />

86 <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> in Computer Networks Configuration Examples


Introduction to TCP/IP<br />

In a single LAN it <strong>is</strong> possible to use<br />

various protocols for the transm<strong>is</strong>sion<br />

of data. The connection between<br />

a workstation computer and<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> runs via the TCP/<br />

IP protocol used on the Internet.<br />

TCP/IP can be used together with<br />

other protocols (e.g. NetBEUI, Apple-<br />

Talk or IPX/SPX) on the same network.<br />

Every device participating in data<br />

transm<strong>is</strong>sion using TCP/IP requires a<br />

unique IP address. An IP address<br />

cons<strong>is</strong>ts of four groups of digits from<br />

0 to 255, each separated by a full<br />

stop. The supplementary protocols<br />

DHCP and PPP automatically assign<br />

IP addresses to devices. Class C networks<br />

<strong>no</strong>rmally use IP addresses in<br />

which the first three numbers are<br />

the same and the last number <strong>is</strong><br />

uniquely assigned to a specific device<br />

in the LAN. On the Internet,<br />

unique addresses assigned by a special<br />

organ<strong>is</strong>ation created for th<strong>is</strong> purpose<br />

are used. Within a LAN, you can<br />

use addresses which are <strong>no</strong>t unique<br />

world-wide.<br />

network mask, the connection <strong>is</strong> establ<strong>is</strong>hed<br />

via the default gateway. If<br />

a device k<strong>no</strong>ws several data routes<br />

to different intermediate stations,<br />

one speaks of a router.<br />

The domain name system (DNS) resolves<br />

a plain text DNS name into an<br />

IP address. The DNS <strong>is</strong> a hierarchically<br />

structured database, d<strong>is</strong>tributed<br />

worldwide. A DNS server can<br />

supply information on the names<br />

and IP addresses for which it <strong>is</strong> responsible.<br />

For all other information,<br />

a DNS server contacts other DNS<br />

servers. For the establ<strong>is</strong>hment of<br />

every connection from the workstation,<br />

it <strong>is</strong> possible to give either an IP<br />

address, or a name that a DNS server<br />

resolves into an IP address.<br />

Note: For further explanations of<br />

technical terms, refer to the Glossary<br />

on the CD-ROM supplied.<br />

TCP/IP enables the establ<strong>is</strong>hment of<br />

connections via one or more intermediate<br />

stations. The dec<strong>is</strong>ion<br />

whether to connect directly or indirectly<br />

to the partner device depends<br />

on the network mask. The network<br />

mask for a class C network <strong>is</strong><br />

255.255.255.0. If the IP address of<br />

the partner device does <strong>no</strong>t fit the<br />

Configuration Examples<br />

Introduction to TCP/IP<br />

87


<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> in a Serverless LAN<br />

In a peer-to-peer network, the workstations<br />

are connected to one a<strong>no</strong>ther<br />

via network cables. In many<br />

networks, the cables run in the form<br />

of a star from a central hub. Such<br />

networks do <strong>no</strong>t require special<br />

servers. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> configuration example<br />

<strong>is</strong> also <strong>valid</strong> for a LAN with a server<br />

using a protocol other than TCP/IP<br />

(e.g. AppleTalk or IPX/SPX).<br />

ISP<br />

(DNS)<br />

S 0<br />

Ext.<br />

PC<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong><br />

(DHCP, RAS,<br />

int. DNS, Internet)<br />

S 0<br />

PC 1<br />

S 0 Net<br />

Net<br />

Hub<br />

PC 2<br />

Net<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> in a serverless LAN<br />

In a serverless LAN, the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> takes over the IP configuration<br />

of the connected workstations.<br />

All TCP/IP settings necessary<br />

for the workstations are assigned by<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> via DHCP (dynamic<br />

host configuration protocol).<br />

In th<strong>is</strong> operating mode, an IP address<br />

space reserved for such networks<br />

<strong>is</strong> used:<br />

192.168.99.254 <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> IP address<br />

192.168.99.129 to 192.168.99.148 DHCP addresses: IP address space for workstations<br />

192.168.100.0 to 192.168.100.10 PPP addresses: IP address space for RAS<br />

dialling<br />

255.255.255.0 Network mask (class C network)<br />

192.168.99.254 DNS server IP address<br />

192.168.99.254 Default gateway IP address<br />

88 <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> in a Serverless LAN Configuration Examples


Install the TCP/IP network protocol<br />

and a Web browser for every workstation<br />

which <strong>is</strong> to have access to the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> network features.<br />

For <strong>no</strong>tes on installing network<br />

cards, refer to Connection by Network<br />

Card (LAN) on <strong>page</strong> 75.<br />

DNS Name Resolution<br />

In a serverless LAN, the internal DNS<br />

name resolution <strong>is</strong> performed by the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. If you type the string<br />

“host.domain” into your browser, a<br />

DNS request <strong>is</strong> sent to the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> IP address. The<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> responds with the<br />

correct IP address, so that the Configurator<br />

home <strong>page</strong> can be called<br />

up.<br />

In a peer-to-peer network (Windows<br />

network), the workstations each<br />

have a name which <strong>is</strong> d<strong>is</strong>played in<br />

the network environment. These<br />

NetBIOS names can differ from the<br />

DNS names assigned to the workstations<br />

by the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. The<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t v<strong>is</strong>ible in the<br />

network environment.<br />

Internet Access<br />

If access to an ISP has been configured<br />

on the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>, the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> can be operated as an<br />

Internet access server without any<br />

additional configuration of the<br />

workstations. When you want to see<br />

a Web <strong>page</strong>, you simply type the URL<br />

(uniform resource locator; Internet<br />

address; “http://...”) in your browser.<br />

In a serverless LAN, the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> configured as a DNS<br />

server and default gateway. The<br />

workstation therefore sends its Internet<br />

connection request to the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

In almost all cases, the request will<br />

contain a DNS name which <strong>is</strong> unk<strong>no</strong>wn<br />

in the internal network.<br />

When you type a URL into your<br />

browser, the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> receives<br />

the request to find the corresponding<br />

IP address. If the name <strong>is</strong> unk<strong>no</strong>wn<br />

in the LAN, the request <strong>is</strong> forwarded<br />

to an ISP’s external DNS<br />

server.<br />

Note: Workstation PCs automatically<br />

add a domain name to URLs<br />

without a dot. You specify th<strong>is</strong> domain<br />

name in the Configurator. For<br />

example, if you have configured<br />

“firm.co.uk” as the domain name, an<br />

access request for “www.firm.co.uk”<br />

will be interpreted as a local DNS request<br />

which does <strong>no</strong>t lead to the establ<strong>is</strong>hment<br />

of an Internet connection.<br />

For th<strong>is</strong> reason, you should<br />

choose a name which <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t used in<br />

the Internet as the domain name<br />

(“firm-opencom.co.uk” for example).<br />

Configuration Examples<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> in a Serverless LAN<br />

89


RAS Access<br />

You can establ<strong>is</strong>h a connection from<br />

an external computer with an ISDN<br />

card to the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. The necessary<br />

TCP/IP settings are transmitted<br />

by the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> on establ<strong>is</strong>hment<br />

of the connection. The<br />

computer that has dialled in <strong>no</strong>w<br />

has access to all services in the LAN<br />

capable of being used via TCP/IP. The<br />

author<strong>is</strong>ation for RAS access <strong>is</strong> set up<br />

in the Configurator via the User<br />

Manager: User Groups menu.<br />

In a serverless LAN, Windows uses<br />

the NetBIOS protocol for accessing<br />

files and printers via the network environment.<br />

NetBIOS can use Net-<br />

BEUI, IPX/SPX or TCP/IP as the transport<br />

protocol. In the network<br />

environment, you can only access<br />

files and printers on workstations using<br />

TCP/IP for NetBIOS.<br />

Note: In a serverless LAN, the workstations<br />

running decide independently<br />

which one <strong>is</strong> to keep the l<strong>is</strong>t of<br />

names v<strong>is</strong>ible in the network environment.<br />

<strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> process <strong>is</strong> triggered by<br />

broadcasts, which can take some time<br />

on a RAS connection. You can shorten<br />

th<strong>is</strong> period by activating the “Find ><br />

Computer” function in the Start menu<br />

and selecting the client computer.<br />

90 <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> in a Serverless LAN Configuration Examples


<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> in a LAN<br />

with an IP-enabled Server<br />

In a LAN with an IP-enabled server,<br />

you should coordinate integration of<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> with the responsible<br />

network admin<strong>is</strong>trator. You must<br />

decide on the IP address space to be<br />

used and which network services<br />

(DHCP, DNS, RAS, Internet access)<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> to handle in the<br />

LAN.<br />

ISP<br />

(DNS)<br />

S 0<br />

Ext.<br />

PC<br />

S 0<br />

PC 1<br />

S 0 Net<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong><br />

Net<br />

S 0 int<br />

Hub<br />

Server<br />

(DHCP, RAS,<br />

int. DNS,<br />

Internet)<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> in a LAN with an<br />

IP-enabled server<br />

PC 2<br />

Net<br />

In many cases, an IP-enabled server<br />

configures the TCP/IP settings via<br />

DHCP for all workstations. On starting,<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> requests TCP/<br />

IP settings via DHCP. If th<strong>is</strong> request <strong>is</strong><br />

responded to, the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

uses the TCP/IP settings received.<br />

You can then use a workstation to<br />

access the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> Configurator<br />

under the IP address assigned by<br />

the server.<br />

S 0<br />

Net<br />

In networks in which the TCP/IP settings<br />

are made manually, you have<br />

to enter the corresponding TCP/IP<br />

settings in the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> Configurator<br />

(NET Configuration: Easy<br />

Access menu). Here the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> acts as the DHCP<br />

server. A workstation requesting the<br />

TCP/IP settings via DHCP then receives<br />

the settings you made in the<br />

Configurator.<br />

DNS Name Resolution<br />

In a LAN with an IP-enabled server,<br />

the latter <strong>is</strong> also responsible for DNS<br />

name resolution. If you want to start<br />

the Configurator by entering a DNS<br />

name, you must link th<strong>is</strong> name on<br />

the server with the IP address used<br />

by the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. For further information,<br />

refer to the server documentation.<br />

Note: To access the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

under the same IP address after a restart,<br />

you must specify th<strong>is</strong> IP address<br />

permanently on a DHCP server. On a<br />

DHCP server it <strong>is</strong> possible to link the<br />

MAC address of a network card with a<br />

specific IP address. You will find details<br />

in the server documentation.<br />

Configuration Examples<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> in a LAN with an IP-enabled Server<br />

91


Internet Access<br />

You can also use the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

as an Internet access server in a LAN<br />

with an IP-enabled server. To do th<strong>is</strong>,<br />

you must enter the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> IP<br />

address on the server as the default<br />

gateway. In addition, you must edit<br />

the internal DNS server configuration<br />

so that the resolution of external<br />

DNS names <strong>is</strong> forwarded to the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

In th<strong>is</strong> example, the Internet connection<br />

<strong>is</strong> establ<strong>is</strong>hed from a workstation<br />

via the server, which in turn requests<br />

Internet access from the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

There are two different ways of suitably<br />

configuring the internal DNS<br />

server. You can enter the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> IP address as a DNS<br />

forwarder. If you require access to<br />

extended DNS information, you can<br />

also configure the DNS server for a<br />

recursive DNS request without the<br />

DNS forwarder. For further explanation,<br />

refer to the DNS server documentation.<br />

ISP<br />

(DNS)<br />

S 0<br />

Ext.<br />

PC<br />

S 0<br />

PC 1<br />

S 0 Net<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong><br />

(Internet)<br />

Net<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> as a DNS server in a<br />

LAN with an IP server<br />

RAS Access<br />

S 0 int<br />

Hub<br />

Server<br />

(DHCP, RAS,<br />

int. DNS)<br />

PC 2<br />

Net<br />

In a LAN with an IP-enabled server<br />

you can also enable external computers<br />

to dial in via the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. To do th<strong>is</strong>, you should<br />

coordinate with the network admin<strong>is</strong>trator<br />

the IP address space which<br />

can be assigned to an external computer<br />

dialling in, and enter it in the<br />

Configurator, NET Configuration:<br />

Easy Access menu, under PPP Addresses.<br />

The user account admin<strong>is</strong>tered by<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>, with which dialling<br />

in <strong>is</strong> permitted, only allows the<br />

establ<strong>is</strong>hment of direct and a<strong>no</strong>nymous<br />

TCP/IP connections such as<br />

HTTP, FTP or SMTP connections. If<br />

you additionally want to allow file or<br />

printer access in the network, you<br />

must set up a suitable user account<br />

on the addressed server for network<br />

log-in. If you use the same log-in<br />

name for the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> user ac-<br />

S 0<br />

Net<br />

92 <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> in a LAN with an IP-enabled Server Configuration Examples


count and the same password for<br />

the network log-in, you have to enter<br />

th<strong>is</strong> combination only once when<br />

dialling in.<br />

ISP<br />

(DNS)<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong><br />

(RAS, Internet)<br />

Server<br />

(DHCP,<br />

int. DNS)<br />

S 0<br />

S 0<br />

Net<br />

Net<br />

Ext.<br />

PC<br />

PC 1<br />

S 0 Net<br />

Hub<br />

PC 2<br />

Net<br />

RAS access by the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> in a<br />

LAN with an IP server<br />

Note: In a larger Windows network<br />

with several segments, the l<strong>is</strong>ts of<br />

computer names v<strong>is</strong>ible in the network<br />

environment can <strong>no</strong> <strong>longer</strong> be<br />

establ<strong>is</strong>hed by broadcasts. In th<strong>is</strong> case<br />

you use a special WINS server whose<br />

address the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> does <strong>no</strong>t<br />

make k<strong>no</strong>wn to the workstation<br />

when dialling in. For th<strong>is</strong> reason, you<br />

enter the address of a WINS server<br />

manually in the network settings of<br />

the workstation.<br />

Configuration Examples<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> in a LAN with an IP-enabled Server<br />

93


LAN-to-LAN Link<br />

You can use the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> to interlink<br />

two LANs via ISDN. To do th<strong>is</strong>,<br />

you configure two <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

systems so that they can dial in to<br />

each other. In order for th<strong>is</strong> to work,<br />

the two LANs must be configured for<br />

different IP address ranges (subnetworks).<br />

For at least one of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> systems, change the<br />

prescribed address range for the<br />

LAN.<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong><br />

(IP=192.168.99.254,<br />

Net=192.168.99.0)<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong><br />

(IP=192.168.11.254,<br />

Net=192.168.11.0)<br />

Net<br />

S 0<br />

S 0<br />

Net<br />

PC 1<br />

PC 2<br />

PC 1<br />

PC 2<br />

Net<br />

Hub<br />

Net<br />

Net<br />

Hub<br />

Net<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> in a LAN-to-LAN link<br />

In the Configurator, NET Configuration:<br />

LAN-LAN menu you can configure<br />

the dial-in settings. The<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> will set up a connection<br />

whenever a TCP/IP data transfer<br />

to the other LAN <strong>is</strong> requested.<br />

As the IP address range, you can select<br />

one of the 256 class C subnetworks<br />

designed for local LANs.<br />

Select a class C sub-network in the<br />

range from 192.168.0.0 to<br />

192.168.255.0.<br />

Note that such a connection <strong>is</strong> only<br />

set up when specific requests are<br />

made. These can be for FTP file<br />

transfers, e-mails or downloading<br />

Web <strong>page</strong>s. Name resolution via<br />

broadcasts <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t possible. If you<br />

w<strong>is</strong>h to use the LAN-to-LAN link to<br />

access files and printers in the Windows<br />

network, you need an IP-enabled<br />

server that admin<strong>is</strong>ters the<br />

name resolution for the Windows<br />

network.<br />

94 LAN-to-LAN Link Configuration Examples


Useful Information on Internet Access<br />

Costs<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> uses a router<br />

function to access the Internet,<br />

which means that it automatically<br />

establ<strong>is</strong>hes an Internet connection<br />

when required and terminates the<br />

connection after a certain period of<br />

time if <strong>no</strong> data are being transmitted.<br />

Unfortunately, programs other than<br />

those typically intended to access<br />

the Internet (such as your browser or<br />

your e-mail software) may send out<br />

data packets which cause an Internet<br />

connection to be establ<strong>is</strong>hed,<br />

even if these programs are <strong>no</strong>t<br />

strictly Internet-associated applications.<br />

Examples of such programs are the<br />

Microsoft TM XP TM operating system,<br />

various multimedia programs such<br />

as Realplayer TM and anti-virus applications<br />

that may establ<strong>is</strong>h an Internet<br />

connection for automatic updates<br />

(the so-called “phone home<br />

function”).<br />

It <strong>is</strong> therefore highly adv<strong>is</strong>able to<br />

limit ISP access by specifying the<br />

maximum monthly connection time<br />

under Connection time per month<br />

(maximal) in the NET Configuration:<br />

Connections: ISP menu on the<br />

web console.<br />

Using the Web<br />

A Web browser <strong>no</strong>t only enables you<br />

to use the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> Configurator<br />

from every workstation but also<br />

to obtain a wealth of information<br />

from the Internet. Simply enter the<br />

desired URL in the address field of<br />

the browser. Access from a standalone<br />

PC via an online service differs<br />

from Internet access via the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> in the following respects:<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

When you request a Web <strong>page</strong>,<br />

dialling in results automatically.<br />

There <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong> d<strong>is</strong>play of dialogues<br />

with manual confirmation of dialling<br />

in or hanging up.<br />

Requesting Web <strong>page</strong>s <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t a<br />

connection-orientated service.<br />

When the Web <strong>page</strong> has been<br />

loaded completely, the TCP/IP<br />

connection <strong>is</strong> cleared. If you do<br />

<strong>no</strong>t request further Web <strong>page</strong>s,<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> automatically<br />

releases the connection to the<br />

Internet after a certain, specifiable<br />

duration.<br />

It <strong>is</strong> possible to call up Web<br />

<strong>page</strong>s simultaneously from several<br />

workstations.<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> can block access<br />

to certain Web <strong>page</strong>s by<br />

means of filter l<strong>is</strong>ts.<br />

Configuration Examples<br />

Useful Information on Internet Access<br />

95


E-mail<br />

One of the most important services<br />

in the Internet <strong>is</strong> e-mail. E-mails are<br />

buffered in individual e-mail accounts<br />

on a mail server. Mail servers<br />

are operated by ISPs for example.<br />

With the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> you can set<br />

up one or more e-mail accounts for<br />

every user account configured on<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. These e-mail accounts<br />

are then checked at regular<br />

intervals.<br />

If there are new e-mails in an e-mail<br />

account, and the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> has<br />

been configured for th<strong>is</strong> function,<br />

the user specified in the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> user account <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>tified<br />

of the new e-mail on h<strong>is</strong> system<br />

terminal. System telephones from<br />

the OpenPhone 6x and 2x product<br />

range can also d<strong>is</strong>play information<br />

such as the sender or the subject of<br />

the e-mail.<br />

NAT<br />

Network address translation (NAT) <strong>is</strong><br />

activated on accessing the Internet<br />

(ISP). You require th<strong>is</strong> feature in order<br />

to translate internal IP addresses<br />

to <strong>valid</strong> external IP addresses. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong><br />

has three important consequences<br />

for Internet access:<br />

■<br />

Several workstations can share a<br />

single Internet access. You do<br />

<strong>no</strong>t require a LAN access, only a<br />

■<br />

■<br />

single account with the Internet<br />

service provider.<br />

The IP addresses used in the LAN<br />

are translated into IP addresses<br />

<strong>valid</strong> worldwide. So you require<br />

<strong>no</strong> such addresses for your LAN.<br />

Only TCP/IP connections triggered<br />

from a workstation can be<br />

establ<strong>is</strong>hed. Consequently, while<br />

you can call up Web <strong>page</strong>s from<br />

a workstation, you can<strong>no</strong>t install<br />

a Web server v<strong>is</strong>ible in the Internet<br />

on a workstation.<br />

Certain protocols can<strong>no</strong>t be used<br />

when NAT <strong>is</strong> being used. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> affects<br />

protocols with the following properties:<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

TCP/IP addresses are transported<br />

in the useful load, e.g.<br />

NetBIOS over TCP/IP.<br />

The protocol requires an active,<br />

inward-directed connection establ<strong>is</strong>hment,<br />

e.g. ICQ.<br />

The protocol will function without<br />

TCP/UDP port numbers, e.g.<br />

ICMP or IGMP.<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> NAT has suitable<br />

processes for ensuring the functions<br />

of many important protocols affected<br />

by these rules. These are the<br />

protocols FTP (in “active” mode), Cu-<br />

SeeMe (“videoconferencing”), IRC<br />

(“chat”), ICMP errors (“traceroute”)<br />

and ICMP echo (“ping”).<br />

96 Useful Information on Internet Access Configuration Examples


Protocols which require inward-directed<br />

connection establ<strong>is</strong>hment<br />

can be configured in the Net Configuration:<br />

Port Access menu. For further<br />

information, refer to the online<br />

help of th<strong>is</strong> menu.<br />

Configuration Examples<br />

Useful Information on Internet Access<br />

97


PBX Networking<br />

As requirements grow, the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> can be operated together<br />

with other PBX installations.<br />

If you merely need a larger number<br />

of connections, it <strong>is</strong> easy to link a<br />

second PBX (“PBX Cascading”). If you<br />

want to operate the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

at several locations with different<br />

PBXs, th<strong>is</strong> <strong>is</strong> possible by PBX Networking.<br />

PBX Cascading<br />

You can combine two PBXs in order<br />

to increase the number of terminals<br />

that can be connected. A master PBX<br />

and a slave PBX are connected to<br />

one a<strong>no</strong>ther by means of a cable.<br />

The two PBXs essentially function<br />

like a single PBX with a higher<br />

number of ports. The master PBX<br />

controls the slave PBX. The following<br />

PBXs from the product family can be<br />

used for cascading:<br />

Master PBX<br />

Slave PBX<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> 120 <strong>OpenCom</strong> 105, <strong>OpenCom</strong> 110,<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> 120<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> 130 <strong>OpenCom</strong> 105, <strong>OpenCom</strong> 110,<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> 120 or <strong>OpenCom</strong> 130<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> 150 <strong>OpenCom</strong> 150<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

Note: The <strong>OpenCom</strong> 107 <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t<br />

equipped with a PCM port. For th<strong>is</strong><br />

reason, PBX cascading <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t possible<br />

with th<strong>is</strong> PBX.<br />

For the PBX Cascading you will need<br />

a license. The license agreement provides<br />

you with the necessary steps<br />

to activate th<strong>is</strong> function<br />

Functionality of PBX<br />

Cascading<br />

Cascaded PBXs must be connected<br />

by means of a tw<strong>is</strong>ted-pair lead with<br />

RJ45 plugs. All eight pins of the lead<br />

must be wired 1 to 1. Both voice and<br />

admin<strong>is</strong>tration data are transferred<br />

via th<strong>is</strong> lead. Connect the lead to the<br />

PCM ports of the two MC+1-3 cen-<br />

98 PBX Cascading PBX Networking


tral control modules of the PBXs. The<br />

shielded CAT-5 lead must <strong>no</strong>t be<br />

<strong>longer</strong> than 50 centimetres.<br />

Note: Owing to the very short perm<strong>is</strong>sible<br />

lead length, the two PBXs<br />

have to be stacked. It <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t possible<br />

to place them side by side.<br />

PBX 1 (Master)<br />

2. Set the DIP switches of both<br />

modules as follows:<br />

DIP Switch Settings<br />

Frame as Master<br />

S1: open<br />

(switch set to “1”)<br />

S2: open (switch<br />

set to “2”)<br />

Frame as Slave<br />

S1: closed (switch<br />

set to “ON”)<br />

S2: open (switch<br />

set to “2”)<br />

data lead (8 pins assigned, joined 1 to 1)<br />

For the location of the DIP<br />

switches (S1and S2), refer to the<br />

illustration MC+1-3: Top view.<br />

3. Re-install the central control<br />

modules in the frames.<br />

BPX 2 (Slave)<br />

Cascaded PBX system<br />

Putting a Cascaded PBX<br />

into Operation<br />

Proceed as follows to put a cascaded<br />

PBX system into operation:<br />

1. If you want to cascade two<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> PBXs, you will<br />

need to set the frame number<br />

using the DIP switches on the<br />

central control module.<br />

To access the DIP switches, remove<br />

both central control modules<br />

(master and slave systems);<br />

proceed as described in Installing<br />

the Central Control Module<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 23.<br />

PBX Networking<br />

PBX Cascading<br />

99


ON<br />

1 2<br />

3<br />

1<br />

2<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

MC+1-3: Top view<br />

4. Mount the slave system frame<br />

above or below the master system.<br />

Connect a system telephone<br />

to the slave system for a<br />

later performance check. Use<br />

the U pn 1 terminal of an ex<strong>is</strong>ting<br />

MS+UPN1-8 or MS+UPN2-8 interface<br />

card.<br />

5. Back up the master system data.<br />

For further information, refer to<br />

the online help topic SYS Configuration:<br />

Data Backup. The<br />

backup procedure also stores<br />

the current configuration data to<br />

the CompactFlash memory card.<br />

6. Switch off the master system if it<br />

<strong>is</strong> operating. D<strong>is</strong>connect the<br />

module from the power supply<br />

by pulling out the mains plug.<br />

7. Connect the two modules by<br />

means of a suitable cable as described<br />

above.<br />

8. Power on the two PBXs. The order<br />

in which you do th<strong>is</strong> does<br />

<strong>no</strong>t matter.<br />

In the PBX Configuration: Ports:<br />

Slots dialogue of the master system’s<br />

Configurator, click on Slave.<br />

Select the slave Type in the Slave:<br />

Change dialogue.<br />

100 PBX Cascading PBX Networking


Please <strong>no</strong>te: If you change the<br />

type of slave system later on, the port<br />

settings that have been made will be<br />

deleted.<br />

The master system then initial<strong>is</strong>es<br />

the slave system. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> may<br />

involve transfer of firmware (operating<br />

software) from the master<br />

system to the slave system.<br />

<strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> can take a few minutes.<br />

9. Configure the system telephone<br />

connected to the slave system<br />

for testing purposes in the Configurator.<br />

In the<br />

PBX Configuration: Ports: Upn<br />

dialogue, click on one of the additionally<br />

d<strong>is</strong>played entries of<br />

the type Upn 1/m/n (1: slave<br />

system, m: slot number, n: U pn<br />

port number).<br />

Note: Changes to the configuration<br />

while initial<strong>is</strong>ing the slave system<br />

may trigger error reports referring to<br />

the ongoing initial<strong>is</strong>ation.<br />

You can see that the initial<strong>is</strong>ation<br />

has been completed from the d<strong>is</strong>play<br />

on the system telephone connected<br />

to the slave system.<br />

Notes<br />

Observe the following when operating<br />

a cascaded PBX system:<br />

■<br />

All U pn , S 0 and a/b ports of the<br />

slave system interface cards can<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

be used with appropriate telephones.<br />

All features of system<br />

telephones on U pn ports are<br />

available without restriction.<br />

The S 0 ports of the slave system<br />

can also be used for trunk lines<br />

or for PBX networking (see PBX<br />

Networking starting on<br />

<strong>page</strong> 102).<br />

It <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t possible to operate a<br />

DECT base station on one of the<br />

U pn ports of the slave system.<br />

The ISDN-L1 reference clock signal<br />

<strong>is</strong> always transferred from<br />

the master to the slave system<br />

and must be acquired from an S 0<br />

port –or preferably an S 2M -<br />

port– on the master system. The<br />

master system therefore needs<br />

to be connected to at least one<br />

ISDN trunk line.<br />

It <strong>is</strong> possible to operate an S 2M<br />

interface card of the type<br />

MS+S2M1-1 in the slave system.<br />

As the ISDN-L1reference clock<br />

signal supplied by an S O interface<br />

card <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t prec<strong>is</strong>e e<strong>no</strong>ugh,<br />

you will also need to operate an<br />

S 2M interface card in the master<br />

system.<br />

The slave system can<strong>no</strong>t be addressed<br />

directly through a LAN.<br />

For configuration, always use<br />

the Web console of the master<br />

system.<br />

PBX Networking<br />

PBX Cascading<br />

101


■<br />

A memory card installed in the<br />

slave system can<strong>no</strong>t be used.<br />

■<br />

To operate the slave system<br />

again <strong>no</strong>rmally, you must reset it<br />

to its factory settings (refer to<br />

Resetting the System Data starting<br />

on <strong>page</strong> 84 and DIP Switch<br />

Settings on <strong>page</strong> 99).<br />

PBX Networking<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> provides all the features<br />

necessary for PBX networking.<br />

You need PBX networking in the following<br />

cases:<br />

■<br />

To operate the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> as<br />

a subsidiary system on a<strong>no</strong>ther<br />

PBX. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> will also allow you to<br />

use the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> as a DECT<br />

server, for example.<br />

■ To network the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

with an <strong>OpenCom</strong> 1000. In th<strong>is</strong><br />

way you can use the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> as a PBX for a<br />

branch office, for instance.<br />

■<br />

■<br />

To network several<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>s into a PBX system.<br />

To use flexible configuration<br />

possibilities of trunk lines for a<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

All settings that affect the configuration<br />

of PBX networking can be found<br />

in the Configurator menu<br />

PBX Configuration: Trunks and in<br />

the PBX Configuration: System:<br />

Settings dialogue under System<br />

linking. Refer also refer to the corresponding<br />

help topics in the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> online help.<br />

Note: If you do <strong>no</strong>t need the features<br />

of PBX networking, the simplified<br />

configuration <strong>is</strong> sufficient in most<br />

cases. For th<strong>is</strong> purpose, assign the<br />

preconfigured trunk groups Multiterminal<br />

access or System access to<br />

the ports. The preconfigured route<br />

called External trunk <strong>no</strong>w makes it<br />

possible to seize an external line immediately<br />

or by first dialling the prefix<br />

“0”. You can rename the preconfigured<br />

bundle and the preconfigured<br />

route if required, but you can<strong>no</strong>t delete<br />

them.<br />

Connections<br />

Networking two or more PBXs<br />

means interconnecting them. The<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> allows you to use<br />

both trunk lines and point-to-point<br />

102 PBX Networking PBX Networking


connections on external S 0 ports or<br />

on the S 2M port.<br />

■<br />

L2: Layer 2 enables communication<br />

via individual error-protected<br />

channels that are independent<br />

of each other.<br />

Example of a PBX network<br />

Various line types and transm<strong>is</strong>sion<br />

protocols can be used for point-topoint<br />

connections. The required network<br />

topology (d<strong>is</strong>tance, connection<br />

capacity) determines which<br />

type of point-to-point connection <strong>is</strong><br />

most suitable.<br />

Protocol: Q.SIG or DSS1<br />

The Q.SIG protocol, designed for<br />

ISDN point-to-point connections, <strong>is</strong><br />

the preferable choice as the transm<strong>is</strong>sion<br />

protocol; alternatively, the<br />

DSS1 protocol, designed for ISDN<br />

dial-up connections in the Euro-<br />

ISDN, can be used. Certain PBX networking<br />

features can only be used<br />

with the Q.SIG protocol, however. In<br />

particular, the identifier indicating<br />

whether a call <strong>is</strong> internal or external<br />

can<strong>no</strong>t be transmitted using DSS1.<br />

Both protocols implement communication<br />

on several protocol layers:<br />

■<br />

PBX PBX PBX PBX<br />

PBX<br />

Trunk line<br />

Point-to-point<br />

connection<br />

L1: Layer 1 defines the physical<br />

line properties and the electrical<br />

coding of signals.<br />

■<br />

L3: Layer 3 defines the admin<strong>is</strong>tration<br />

of the individual channels<br />

and implements the features<br />

designed for ISDN.<br />

Master/Slave<br />

For an ISDN connection, it <strong>is</strong> possible<br />

to determine which PBX <strong>is</strong> the protocol<br />

master and which the protocol<br />

slave. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> relationship can be determined<br />

for all three protocol layers independently<br />

of one a<strong>no</strong>ther.<br />

For each protocol layer, the PBX at<br />

the other end always has to be suitably<br />

configured. If one PBX <strong>is</strong> the protocol<br />

master for a layer, the other<br />

PBX must be the protocol slave for<br />

th<strong>is</strong> same layer. Normally all three<br />

protocol layers are configured identically.<br />

In the case of a trunk line, the<br />

network operator <strong>is</strong> the protocol<br />

master for all three layers.<br />

Note: In the case of an S 2M line, it <strong>is</strong><br />

also possible to determine for each<br />

useful channel which end can admin<strong>is</strong>ter<br />

a channel (master = internally<br />

seized or slave = externally seized).<br />

On S 0 lines th<strong>is</strong> setting <strong>is</strong> determined<br />

by “L3 master” for both B-channels.<br />

L1 Clock<br />

To enable PBXs in the ISDN network<br />

to communicate with each other,<br />

they must be “clock-aligned”. The L1<br />

PBX Networking<br />

PBX Networking<br />

103


protocol master sets the clock for<br />

layer 1, and the L1 protocol slave<br />

adopts (synchron<strong>is</strong>es to) th<strong>is</strong> clock.<br />

When planning a PBX networking<br />

scheme, you must make sure that<br />

the L1 clock propagates from a master<br />

via a number of PBXs.<br />

Network<br />

operator<br />

M<br />

S<br />

PBX1<br />

M<br />

S<br />

PBX 2<br />

PBX 3<br />

Trunk line<br />

Point-to-point<br />

connection<br />

Example: propagation of the L1 clock<br />

If more than one port with the setting<br />

L1 Type = “Slave” <strong>is</strong> configured<br />

on an <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> and the setting<br />

L1 sync possible has been activated,<br />

then one of the ports <strong>is</strong> automatically<br />

defined as the L1 clock source.<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> will automatically<br />

switch the clock source to a<strong>no</strong>ther<br />

port configured as an L1 clock source<br />

(if a line fails, for example).<br />

LED 3 (top right) of an interface card<br />

will light up if one of the interfaces<br />

on the card has been selected as a<br />

clock source. If an S 2M interface of<br />

the type MS+S2M1-1 <strong>is</strong> installed, it<br />

will be selected as the preferred<br />

clock source.<br />

Please <strong>no</strong>te: Reciprocal or circular<br />

application of the L1 clock <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t<br />

allowed.<br />

M<br />

M<br />

S<br />

S<br />

Example: In the above case you<br />

could reverse the L1 slave/master<br />

setting for the connection between<br />

PBX 1 and PBX 3. However, if you<br />

then activate the setting<br />

L1 sync possible for the port of PBX<br />

1, th<strong>is</strong> may cause parts of the PBX<br />

network to stop functioning temporarily.<br />

When applying the L1 clock of trunk<br />

lines, you can assume that the public<br />

network <strong>is</strong> “clock-aligned”. So, in the<br />

above example, you can connect additional<br />

trunk lines to one of the<br />

PBXs.<br />

Types of Point-to-Point<br />

Connection<br />

There are different types of connection<br />

available for an ISDN point-topoint<br />

connection between two PBXs,<br />

depending on the d<strong>is</strong>tance between<br />

them.<br />

Direct Connection<br />

<strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> type of point-to-point connection<br />

joins the two systems directly to<br />

each other using a crossover<br />

tw<strong>is</strong>ted-pair cable. An S 0 connection<br />

can be used for d<strong>is</strong>tances up to 1,000<br />

metres, while an S 2M connection can<br />

span up to 250 meters. Normally one<br />

PBX <strong>is</strong> the protocol master for all<br />

three layers, and the other PBX <strong>is</strong> the<br />

protocol slave for all three layers.<br />

104 PBX Networking PBX Networking


PBX 1<br />

L1 master<br />

L2 master<br />

L3 master<br />

Direct connection<br />

PBX 2<br />

L1 slave<br />

L2 slave<br />

L3 slave<br />

Note: The active transm<strong>is</strong>sion system<br />

itself gets its L1 clock either from<br />

the network operator or from a clock<br />

generator connected by wire.<br />

■<br />

Use the RJ45 jacks on one of the<br />

external S 0 ports for an S 0 connection<br />

between two<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>s.<br />

PBX 1, S 0 ext<br />

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1<br />

PBX 2, S 0 ext<br />

(RJ-45 socket)<br />

Wiring of a direct connection<br />

Connection via an Active<br />

Transm<strong>is</strong>sion System<br />

For d<strong>is</strong>tances exceeding the range of<br />

a direct connection, an active transm<strong>is</strong>sion<br />

system can increase the<br />

range to up to 50 km. Normally the<br />

L1 master <strong>is</strong> the transm<strong>is</strong>sion system<br />

for the two connected PBXs. For the<br />

protocol layers L2 and L3, one PBX <strong>is</strong><br />

<strong>no</strong>rmally the protocol master and<br />

the other PBX <strong>is</strong> the protocol slave.<br />

PBX 1<br />

L1 slave<br />

L2 master<br />

L3 master<br />

Transm<strong>is</strong>sion<br />

System<br />

L1 master<br />

PBX 2<br />

L1 slave<br />

L2 slave<br />

L3 slave<br />

Connection by an active transm<strong>is</strong>sion<br />

system<br />

Connection via the Public<br />

Network<br />

Point-to-point connections via the<br />

public network of a network operator<br />

can be used for bridging d<strong>is</strong>tances<br />

beyond 50 km. Due to the<br />

long d<strong>is</strong>tance involved, for technical<br />

reasons it <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t possible to synchron<strong>is</strong>e<br />

the L2 protocol. Consequently,<br />

the public network <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>rmally the<br />

protocol master for protocol layers<br />

L1 and L2. One PBX <strong>is</strong> therefore the<br />

L3 master and the other PBX the L3<br />

slave.<br />

PBX 1<br />

L1 slave<br />

L2 slave<br />

L3 master<br />

Public<br />

network<br />

L1 master<br />

L2 master<br />

Point-to-point connection via a public<br />

network<br />

Configuration<br />

PBX 2<br />

L1 slave<br />

L2 slave<br />

L3 slave<br />

The possible configurations described<br />

below can be set up in the<br />

Web console using the PBX Configuration:<br />

Trunks menu.<br />

Trunk groups<br />

<strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> <strong>is</strong> a group of lines of the same<br />

type and direction. A line can only be<br />

assigned to one trunk group.<br />

PBX Networking<br />

PBX Networking<br />

105


Network<br />

operator<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

PBX 1<br />

PBX 2<br />

E<br />

D<br />

PBX 3<br />

Bundle<br />

Trunk line<br />

Point-to-point<br />

connection<br />

Example of a PBX network with trunk<br />

groups<br />

PBX 2. Trunk groups “C,” “E” and “A”<br />

are assigned to th<strong>is</strong> route. If a user<br />

connected to PBX 1 wants to reach a<br />

party in PBX 2, lines will be seized in<br />

the following order:<br />

■<br />

PBX 1 first searches for a free<br />

channel in the “C” trunk group.<br />

In the above example, the following<br />

trunk groups are configured for<br />

PBX 1:<br />

■<br />

Two S 0 lines in a multi-terminal<br />

configuration to the network<br />

operator which are assigned to<br />

the “A” trunk group.<br />

■<br />

If all the lines in trunk group “C”<br />

are busy, the system tries to set<br />

up a connection via trunk group<br />

“E”. PBX 3 switches the connection<br />

through, provided it <strong>is</strong> appropriately<br />

configured (refer to<br />

Numbering starting on<br />

<strong>page</strong> 107).<br />

■<br />

■<br />

Two S 0 point-to-point connections<br />

to PBX 2 which are assigned<br />

to the “C” trunk group.<br />

One S 0 point-to-point connection<br />

to PBX 3 which <strong>is</strong> assigned<br />

to the “E” trunk group.<br />

Note: A line or a trunk group can<strong>no</strong>t<br />

be seized directly. It <strong>is</strong> always performed<br />

indirectly via a route.<br />

■<br />

■<br />

If it was <strong>no</strong>t possible to set up an<br />

indirect connection via PBX 3,<br />

the system tries again via trunk<br />

group “A”. The “prefix” necessary<br />

for th<strong>is</strong> can be configured<br />

with the route.<br />

The user does <strong>no</strong>t get a busy signal<br />

until the attempt to set up<br />

an indirect connection via the<br />

network operator has also failed.<br />

Routes<br />

A route <strong>is</strong> a group of trunk groups<br />

enabling a connection in one direction.<br />

If the first trunk group of a<br />

route <strong>is</strong> fully utilized, the next trunk<br />

group <strong>is</strong> seized (“trunk group overflow”).<br />

One trunk group can also be<br />

used for different routes.<br />

In the above example, a route set up<br />

for PBX 1 allows a connection to<br />

Note: If an internal connection <strong>is</strong><br />

switched via a network operator, the<br />

call <strong>is</strong> signalled using the external<br />

number of the calling PBX.<br />

For each route you can define a randomly<br />

selectable code digit for seizing<br />

the route. You can also configure<br />

whether a user <strong>is</strong> author<strong>is</strong>ed to seize<br />

a particular route, whether LCR <strong>is</strong> to<br />

be used for one of the trunk groups<br />

106 PBX Networking PBX Networking


and the criteria (business or private<br />

call, booking numbers) for evaluating<br />

call data.<br />

Numbering<br />

A user can seize a particular route by<br />

pre-dialling a specific code digit.<br />

With th<strong>is</strong> “open numbering”, a user<br />

must always dial th<strong>is</strong> code digit and<br />

then the telephone number in order<br />

to reach a party in a<strong>no</strong>ther PBX.<br />

If <strong>no</strong>ne of the telephone numbers in<br />

your PBX network occur twice, you<br />

can also configure “closed numbering”,<br />

allowing the same telephone<br />

number to be used for reaching each<br />

user within the PBX network.<br />

With closed numbering, the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> determines which<br />

route to seize from the telephone<br />

number dialled. The information<br />

needed for routing a call can be configured<br />

in a numbering table containing<br />

up to 100 entries. You use<br />

th<strong>is</strong> table to assign telephone numbers<br />

and/or ranges of telephone<br />

numbers to a particular route.<br />

A default entry in the numbering table<br />

makes it possible to seize a “default<br />

route” for all remaining unassigned<br />

numbers. In particular, th<strong>is</strong><br />

simplifies configuration of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> as a subsidiary system:<br />

the only entry you assign to the<br />

default entry <strong>is</strong> the route to the host<br />

system<br />

PBX<br />

100-199<br />

b<br />

a<br />

PBX<br />

400-499<br />

c<br />

4: b<br />

D: c<br />

D: a<br />

d<br />

PBX<br />

200-299<br />

h<br />

g<br />

PBX<br />

500-599<br />

3: e<br />

5: h<br />

D: d<br />

3: i<br />

D: g<br />

Example of closed numbering tables<br />

The automatic switching of call requests<br />

(i.e. routing) by means of<br />

trunk group overflow or default<br />

numbering can lead to “circular<br />

switching”.<br />

To avoid th<strong>is</strong>, a “transit” counter <strong>is</strong><br />

incremented whenever a connection<br />

<strong>is</strong> switched through on Q.SIG lines.<br />

When the configured maximum<br />

value <strong>is</strong> reached, further switching<br />

stops.<br />

Technical Details<br />

PBX<br />

300-399<br />

5: k<br />

D: f<br />

A different PBX number must be set<br />

for each <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> in a PBX network.<br />

<strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> setting can be found in<br />

the Web console, in the menu<br />

PBX Configuration: System under<br />

the heading System linking. You can<br />

also set the maximum value for the<br />

transit counter there. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> value depends<br />

on the topology of the PBX<br />

network and should allow the system<br />

to have the maximum number<br />

of further connections possible.<br />

You can d<strong>is</strong>play the connection status<br />

of the lines at any time in the<br />

Configurator menu System info:<br />

e<br />

i<br />

f<br />

k<br />

D:Default<br />

Route<br />

PBX Networking<br />

PBX Networking<br />

107


PBX: Trunks. You should check th<strong>is</strong><br />

in particular after making changes<br />

to a configuration to see whether all<br />

the lines used for system networking<br />

are operable.<br />

Some of the features possible in<br />

Q.SIG are <strong>no</strong>t supported by<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> with all their options,<br />

for example callback on busy within<br />

the Q.SIG network. The call categories<br />

defined in Q.SIG (e.g. Emergency<br />

Call, Operator, Normal) and the Q.SIG<br />

name transm<strong>is</strong>sion feature (“user<br />

names”) are fully supported.<br />

The code digits to be used for seizing<br />

a route with open numbering are<br />

<strong>no</strong>t transmitted to the destination<br />

PBX and thus can<strong>no</strong>t be evaluated<br />

by it. To reseize a route (for example<br />

for a callback), you must set the appropriate<br />

digit prefixes in the trunk<br />

group configuration for the routes to<br />

be reseized.<br />

Tip: If, for example, you are configuring<br />

a route which can be seized using<br />

routing code “5” and have selected<br />

one or more bundles for th<strong>is</strong><br />

route, change the Prefix for dest.<br />

call number at incoming internal<br />

setting to “5” for th<strong>is</strong> bundle in order<br />

to enable the route to be reseized.<br />

108 PBX Networking PBX Networking


Licensing Information<br />

A licence <strong>is</strong> required for certain additional<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> program packages,<br />

for example for the internal<br />

voice-mail system called OpenVoice.<br />

The following information <strong>is</strong> for customers<br />

who have already obtained<br />

licences for an <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> and<br />

would like to cascade or network<br />

their ex<strong>is</strong>ting system with a<strong>no</strong>ther<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

The licensing confirmation for the<br />

cascading contains all the information<br />

you need to carry out th<strong>is</strong> procedure.<br />

Note: You will need the serial numbers<br />

of both infocom systems for<br />

porting the activation keys. The serial<br />

numbers can be found in the<br />

Web console's Configurator, in the<br />

System Info: Versions menu.<br />

PBX Networking<br />

If you network two <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

systems with each other, you<br />

needn't generate any new activation<br />

keys but can continue to use the corresponding<br />

functions on the ex<strong>is</strong>ting<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. The “d<strong>is</strong>advantage”<br />

of th<strong>is</strong> alternative <strong>is</strong> that you have to<br />

admin<strong>is</strong>ter a separate configuration<br />

on each <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

PBX Cascading<br />

In the case of PBX cascading, the<br />

master system admin<strong>is</strong>ters the overall<br />

configuration.<br />

If you have already installed activation<br />

keys on an ex<strong>is</strong>ting<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>, they have to be<br />

ported to the master system<br />

(<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>).<br />

In th<strong>is</strong> case, new activation keys for<br />

the use of additional program packages<br />

must be generated on the<br />

DeTeWe licence server<br />

(http://lizenz.detewe.de).<br />

PBX Networking<br />

Licensing Information<br />

109


Team Functions<br />

Introduction<br />

With the team functions you can<br />

manage your telephone communication<br />

tasks by assigning lines with<br />

separate call numbers to the keys of<br />

different terminals. The terminal users,<br />

or team members, can thus pick<br />

up one a<strong>no</strong>ther’s calls or telephone<br />

each other using the configured<br />

keys.<br />

Team functions can only be configured<br />

on the corded system telephones<br />

of the OpenPhone 6x product<br />

line because only these have the<br />

required features.<br />

Explanation of Keys<br />

The team functions are programmed<br />

on the call keys of the OpenPhone 6x<br />

telephones. Depending on the terminal,<br />

different numbers of call keys<br />

are available:<br />

Number of available call-keys<br />

Note: Only one function or call<br />

number can be programmed for each<br />

call key.<br />

The following keys can be used:<br />

■<br />

Telephone<br />

OpenPhone 61<br />

OpenPhone 63<br />

OpenPhone 65<br />

Number of keys<br />

One key with a d<strong>is</strong>play,<br />

five keys without<br />

a d<strong>is</strong>play<br />

Three keys with a<br />

d<strong>is</strong>play, five keys<br />

without a d<strong>is</strong>play<br />

19 keys with a d<strong>is</strong>play:<br />

nine on the telephone<br />

itself and 10<br />

on an add-on<br />

Trunk key: Calls (for the programmed<br />

call number, e.g. 11)<br />

are signalled to th<strong>is</strong> key, and you<br />

can make internal and external<br />

calls via th<strong>is</strong> number. A trunk key<br />

can be programmed with a substitute<br />

function (with a<strong>no</strong>ther<br />

team member acting as the substitute).<br />

Calls for you are then<br />

signalled to the terminal of a<strong>no</strong>ther<br />

team member. A trunk key<br />

also provides functions for man-<br />

110 Introduction Team Functions


■<br />

■<br />

aging calls. For example, you can<br />

configure call protection if you<br />

do <strong>no</strong>t want to be d<strong>is</strong>turbed, or<br />

call diversion to a<strong>no</strong>ther telephone.<br />

Team key: As with a trunk key, a<br />

team key can be used to receive<br />

or make calls. However, th<strong>is</strong> key<br />

can<strong>no</strong>t be used to change the<br />

settings for managing calls; it <strong>is</strong><br />

<strong>no</strong>t possible, for example, to<br />

configure call diversion to a<strong>no</strong>ther<br />

telephone. Calls made via<br />

a team key are signalled to all<br />

terminals with a trunk key that<br />

has been programmed with the<br />

same number. For example, the<br />

team key with the number 11<br />

calls all trunk keys with the<br />

number 11.<br />

Busy key: The purpose of a busy<br />

key <strong>is</strong> to make the busy status of<br />

other team members v<strong>is</strong>ible. An<br />

incoming call for a busy team<br />

member <strong>is</strong> signalled on the<br />

other team member's busy key.<br />

That team member can take th<strong>is</strong><br />

call by pressing the busy key,<br />

which seizes h<strong>is</strong> own terminal's<br />

trunk key. Calls taken via the<br />

busy key are <strong>no</strong>t entered in the<br />

call l<strong>is</strong>t of the team member<br />

who was originally called. In addition,<br />

it <strong>is</strong> possible to call the respective<br />

team member via h<strong>is</strong><br />

busy key when h<strong>is</strong> terminal <strong>is</strong><br />

idle. You set up a call to th<strong>is</strong><br />

team member by pressing your<br />

own trunk key.<br />

■<br />

Direct call key: Only outgoing<br />

calls can be made with a direct<br />

call key; they are signalled to all<br />

terminals with the same number<br />

programmed to a trunk key.<br />

Calls via a direct call key are signalled<br />

to the destination terminal<br />

even if that terminal has<br />

been programmed with a substitution<br />

function or call protection.<br />

If the destination terminal<br />

has been configured for call diversion,<br />

the direct call <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t diverted.<br />

Which key <strong>is</strong> suitable for which<br />

purpose?<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

Trunk keys can be assigned call<br />

numbers for managing central<br />

communication tasks, for example,<br />

customer support. If the call<br />

numbers of the support department<br />

are assigned to trunk keys<br />

on all of its terminals, then all<br />

members of the support department<br />

can receive and manage<br />

calls and use the substitute<br />

function.<br />

Team keys, for example, can be<br />

used to create a project group<br />

within a department. Calls from<br />

customers of th<strong>is</strong> group can then<br />

be answered by any team member<br />

who <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t busy. The team<br />

members can call each other by<br />

the team keys.<br />

A busy key can be used to configure<br />

an attendant terminal<br />

Team Functions<br />

Introduction<br />

111


■<br />

showing the status of the individual<br />

users. The attendant terminal<br />

sees the status of the users<br />

and can put calls through by<br />

simply pressing the key.<br />

Direct call keys, for example,<br />

can be configured at a terminal<br />

in a conference room in order to<br />

call the secretary.<br />

Team Configuration<br />

You can create teams and program<br />

call keys in the Configurator of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> (PBX Configuration:<br />

Groups and Ports: Upn menu).<br />

Call key 1 <strong>is</strong> preset as a trunk key on<br />

all system telephones. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> setting<br />

can be changed by the system admin<strong>is</strong>trator.<br />

Examples of Use<br />

The following examples illustrate<br />

the various uses of teams and team<br />

functions.<br />

For information on the d<strong>is</strong>play texts<br />

and how to use the individual functions,<br />

refer to the chapter “Managing<br />

Calls in a Team” in the “Open-<br />

Phone 61, 63, 65” user guide.<br />

11<br />

10<br />

12<br />

Secretary<br />

TrK 11: Secretary<br />

TrK 10: Executive<br />

DK 10: Executive<br />

Executive<br />

TrK 10: Executive<br />

TrK 11: Secretary<br />

TrK 12: Private<br />

Executive´s Parallel<br />

TrK 10: Executive<br />

Executive/Secretary<br />

Team<br />

In th<strong>is</strong> example, the executive/secretary<br />

team compr<strong>is</strong>es two members:<br />

the executive and the secretary. The<br />

secretary has one OpenPhone 63<br />

system telephone, and the executive<br />

has two, one of which <strong>is</strong> used as a<br />

parallel telephone in a sofa suite.<br />

TrK 12: Private<br />

Example: executive/secretary team<br />

Line Seizure<br />

The secretary can be reached on the<br />

call number 11 (trunk key TrK 11:<br />

secretary’s office).<br />

The executive can be reached on the<br />

call number 10 (trunk key TrK 10: executive’s<br />

office). He can also answer<br />

calls from h<strong>is</strong> parallel telephone. In<br />

112 Examples of Use Team Functions


addition, a private line <strong>is</strong> configured<br />

for both of the executive’s telephones<br />

(trunk key TrK 12: private).<br />

Call numbers 11 and 10 are both<br />

configured as a trunk key on the executive’s<br />

and the secretary’s terminal<br />

respectively. Thus the executive and<br />

the secretary can use either call<br />

number (for answering as well as<br />

making calls). Each can act as a substitute<br />

for the other.<br />

The secretary’s terminal also has the<br />

executive’s call number configured<br />

as a direct call number (DK 10: executive’s<br />

office). The secretary can<br />

therefore reach the executive and<br />

put through calls even if the executive<br />

has programmed a substitute.<br />

Line Busy Indication<br />

If a line <strong>is</strong> busy, e.g. TrK 11 secretary’s<br />

office, the other terminal will indicate<br />

th<strong>is</strong>. The executive’s private calls<br />

via TrK 12 are <strong>no</strong>t indicated on the<br />

secretary’s terminal since <strong>no</strong> appropriate<br />

trunk key <strong>is</strong> configured on the<br />

latter’s telephone.<br />

Call Signalling<br />

In th<strong>is</strong> configuration example, calls<br />

to one’s own call number are signalled<br />

acoustically on the following<br />

telephones:<br />

■<br />

■<br />

Call number 11 on the secretary’s<br />

telephone<br />

Call numbers 10 and 12 on the<br />

executive’s telephone.<br />

Calls for the other team member’s<br />

call number are indicated by an optical<br />

signal on one’s own telephone<br />

(flashing trunk key LED).<br />

The parallel telephone will indicate<br />

calls only by an optical signal.<br />

Time-delayed acoustic signalling can<br />

be configured for TrK 10 on the secretary’s<br />

telephone. If the executive,<br />

for example, does <strong>no</strong>t answer a call<br />

within 10 seconds, the secretary’s<br />

telephone will start to ring.<br />

If the executive activates a substitute<br />

function with the secretary as<br />

the substitute, calls for call number<br />

10 will be indicated on the executive’s<br />

telephone by an optical signal<br />

only, but signalled acoustically on<br />

the secretary’s telephone. The secretary<br />

can also activate a substitute<br />

function. Calls for call number 11 are<br />

then signalled acoustically on the<br />

executive’s telephone, and indicated<br />

by an optical signal on the parallel<br />

telephone and the secretary’s telephone.<br />

Three-member Team<br />

The three-member team described<br />

here <strong>is</strong> an example of a team configuration<br />

within a project group, e.g.<br />

export sales.<br />

Each team member has one Open-<br />

Phone 63 system telephone with all<br />

Team Functions<br />

Examples of Use<br />

113


call keys programmed as trunk and<br />

team keys.<br />

10<br />

11<br />

Miller<br />

TrK 10: Miller<br />

TK 11: Johnson<br />

TK 12: Smith<br />

Johnson<br />

Trk 11: Johnson<br />

TK 10: Miller<br />

TK 12: Smith<br />

Line Busy Indication<br />

If a line <strong>is</strong> busy, e.g. TrK 11 Johnson,<br />

the team keys 11 on Miller’s and<br />

Smith’s telephones will indicate th<strong>is</strong>.<br />

Call Signalling<br />

In th<strong>is</strong> example, calls via the trunk<br />

keys are signalled acoustically. Calls<br />

via the team keys are indicated by a<br />

v<strong>is</strong>ual signal (the team key LED<br />

flashes).<br />

12<br />

Smith<br />

TrK 12: Smith<br />

TK 10: Miller<br />

TK 11: Johnson<br />

Example: three-member team<br />

Line Seizure<br />

Each team member’s call number,<br />

e.g. call number 10 for Miller, <strong>is</strong> programmed<br />

as a trunk key on h<strong>is</strong> telephone.<br />

Unified Team<br />

The unified team described here <strong>is</strong><br />

an example of a team configuration<br />

within a department in which calls<br />

are to be managed quickly (e.g. support<br />

department).<br />

Each team member has one Open-<br />

Phone 63 system telephone with all<br />

call keys programmed as trunk keys.<br />

On the other telephones in the team,<br />

th<strong>is</strong> call number <strong>is</strong> programmed as a<br />

team key (e.g. TK 10 on Johnson’s<br />

and Smith’s telephones). The team<br />

members can thus see which<br />

number a call <strong>is</strong> for and can answer it<br />

by pressing the appropriate team<br />

key.<br />

10<br />

11<br />

Miller<br />

TrK 10: Support 1<br />

TrK 11: Support 2<br />

TrK 12: Support 3<br />

Johnson<br />

TrK 10: Support 1<br />

TrK 11: Support 2<br />

TrK 12: Support 3<br />

The team members can call each<br />

other via the team keys. For example,<br />

Miller can call number 12 by<br />

pressing TK 12; the call <strong>is</strong> then signalled<br />

to Smith’s telephone on<br />

TrK 12.<br />

12<br />

Example: unified team<br />

Smith<br />

TrK 10: Support 1<br />

TrK 11: Support 2<br />

TrK 12: Support 3<br />

114 Examples of Use Team Functions


Line Seizure<br />

Call numbers 10, 11 and 12 are programmed<br />

as trunk keys on each<br />

team member’s telephone (TrK 10<br />

to TrK 12.<br />

All team members can use these<br />

numbers for answering as well as<br />

making calls.<br />

Tip: In th<strong>is</strong> team configuration it <strong>is</strong><br />

useful to program one of the function<br />

keys on each telephone with the<br />

“Hold” function. A call, e.g. for<br />

TrK 11, can then be put on hold by<br />

pressing the function key. If a<strong>no</strong>ther<br />

team member then presses trunk<br />

key TrK 11 on h<strong>is</strong> telephone, he can<br />

accept the call. For further information<br />

on function keys, refer to the<br />

“OpenPhone 61, 63, 65” user guide.<br />

Line Busy Indication<br />

If a line <strong>is</strong> busy, e.g. TrK 11 Johnson,<br />

the trunk keys on the other team telephones<br />

will indicate th<strong>is</strong>.<br />

Call Signalling<br />

In th<strong>is</strong> example, calls via all trunk<br />

keys are signalled acoustically.<br />

Toggle Team<br />

The toggle team described here illustrates<br />

how a large number of call<br />

numbers can be managed efficiently<br />

with the help of team functions.<br />

Each team member has one<br />

OpenPhone 65 with all call keys programmed<br />

as trunk and team keys.<br />

10<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

14<br />

15<br />

16<br />

20<br />

21<br />

22<br />

23<br />

24<br />

25<br />

26<br />

Example: toggle team<br />

Miller 14:22<br />

Mi.14.Feb.01<br />

TrK 10: Support 1<br />

TrK 11: Support 2<br />

TrK 12: Support 3<br />

TrK 13: Support 4<br />

TrK 14: Support 5<br />

TrK 15: Hotline 1<br />

TrK 16: Hotline 2<br />

TK 20: Support 6<br />

TK 25: Hotline 3<br />

Johnson 14:22<br />

Mi.14.Feb.01<br />

TrK 20: Support 6<br />

TrK 21: Support 7<br />

TrK 22: Support 8<br />

TrK 23: Support 9<br />

TrK 24: Support 10<br />

TrK 25: Hotline 3<br />

TrK 26: Hotline 4<br />

TK 10: Support 1<br />

TK 15: Hotline 1<br />

Line Seizure<br />

Each team member <strong>is</strong> assigned<br />

seven call numbers, each programmed<br />

as a trunk key (TrK 10 to<br />

TrK 16 and TrK 20 to TrK 26). For each<br />

member, these trunk keys are programmed<br />

either as support numbers<br />

or hotline numbers.<br />

The first support number and the<br />

first hotline number of each team<br />

member <strong>is</strong> programmed as a team<br />

key on the other member’s tele-<br />

Team Functions<br />

Examples of Use<br />

115


phone, e.g. TrK 10 and TrK 15 on<br />

Miller’s telephone as TK 10 and TK 15<br />

on Johnson’s telephone. The assumption<br />

here <strong>is</strong> that most calls will<br />

go to the respective first call numbers,<br />

and team members can thus<br />

help each other out by answering<br />

one a<strong>no</strong>ther’s calls.<br />

On each telephone it <strong>is</strong> possible to<br />

toggle between the calls on individual<br />

lines, e.g. TrK 10 and TrK 11, by<br />

pressing the appropriate key (toggling).<br />

Every call on a trunk key can be<br />

transferred to any other party by<br />

means of the R key. For more information,<br />

refer to the chapter entitled<br />

“Consultation, Toggling, Transfer<br />

and Conference” in the “OpenPhone<br />

61, 63, 65” user guide.<br />

Line Busy Indication<br />

If a line <strong>is</strong> busy, e.g. TrK 10 on Miller’s<br />

telephone, the appropriate team key<br />

will indicate th<strong>is</strong>, e.g. TK 10 on Johnson’s<br />

telephone.<br />

Call Signalling<br />

In th<strong>is</strong> example, calls via trunk keys<br />

are signalled acoustically. Calls via<br />

team keys are indicated by a v<strong>is</strong>ual<br />

signal (the team key LED flashes).<br />

116 Examples of Use Team Functions


Call Queue<br />

Introduction<br />

A queue can be activated for the telephone<br />

numbers of any type of telephone,<br />

i.e. for system, analogue,<br />

ISDN and DECT telephones.<br />

If a call number with a queue <strong>is</strong> busy,<br />

calls to th<strong>is</strong> number enter the queue.<br />

A caller in the queue hears an idle<br />

tone.<br />

Calls which remain in the queue for<br />

too long are cleared from the queue.<br />

The caller then gets a busy tone. The<br />

time until an external call <strong>is</strong> cleared<br />

from a queue <strong>is</strong> defined by the network<br />

operator. In Germany th<strong>is</strong> <strong>is</strong><br />

usually two minutes and in other European<br />

countries usually three minutes.<br />

If more than one telephone number<br />

(e.g. trunk or team keys) has been<br />

configured for a telephone, separate<br />

queues are used for each number.<br />

On the OpenPhone 65 system telephone,<br />

additional calls are signalled<br />

by a brief tone in the loudspeaker<br />

and in the d<strong>is</strong>play. If calls are in the<br />

queue, a number at the beginning of<br />

the second line of the d<strong>is</strong>play on the<br />

OpenPhone 65 indicates how full the<br />

queue <strong>is</strong>. If more than one telephone<br />

number with a queue <strong>is</strong> configured<br />

on the telephone, the total number<br />

of entries are d<strong>is</strong>played.<br />

Calls in a queue are handled by the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> in the following order<br />

of priority: instant connection, sensor<br />

calls, automatic recalls, VIP calls,<br />

then other internal and external<br />

calls. Sensor calls thus have priority<br />

over other calls, for example. Calls of<br />

the same priority level are switched<br />

in the order of their arrival.<br />

The system admin<strong>is</strong>trator sets the<br />

number of calls that can be placed in<br />

a queue individually for each user<br />

group. The value can lie between “0”<br />

and “99”. The “0” value deactivates<br />

the ”Call queue” function for a user<br />

group. When the maximum number<br />

of calls in the queue <strong>is</strong> reached, further<br />

callers hear a busy tone.<br />

Only calls which have a “voice” service<br />

indicator are admin<strong>is</strong>tered in a<br />

queue.<br />

Note: As calling fax machines often<br />

operate with the “voice” service<br />

indicator (e.g. on analogue ports),<br />

you should assign ports for fax machines<br />

on the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> to a user<br />

group without a queue.<br />

Call Queue<br />

Introduction<br />

117


Queues can be combined with the<br />

“forwarding,” “pickup” and “hunt<br />

group” functions, for example, in order<br />

to configure an attendant terminal<br />

for an operator.<br />

Activation of Queues<br />

Queues can be activated per user<br />

group. The default factory setting<br />

of queues for the preset groups “Admin<strong>is</strong>trators”<br />

and “Guests” <strong>is</strong> off.<br />

When using queues, it often makes<br />

sense to activate call waiting protection.<br />

For th<strong>is</strong> purpose, “Call waiting<br />

protection” author<strong>is</strong>ation must be<br />

allocated to the user group, and call<br />

waiting protection must be activated<br />

on the terminal.<br />

You should configure a new user<br />

group (e.g. “Operators”) and activate<br />

the author<strong>is</strong>ations “Call queue”, “Call<br />

waiting protection” and, if necessary,<br />

“Call forwarding”. If users belong<br />

to th<strong>is</strong> group, a queue will be<br />

activated automatically for all telephone<br />

numbers assigned to them.<br />

Call Forwarding<br />

Forwarded calls of the forwarding<br />

type “Immediately” and “On busy”<br />

have priority over queues. The<br />

queue of the forwarding telephone<br />

<strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t used for forwarding calls in<br />

th<strong>is</strong> manner.<br />

During the configuration of th<strong>is</strong> type<br />

of call forwarding, the contents of<br />

the queue are <strong>no</strong>t transferred to the<br />

target terminal. If there are still calls<br />

in the queue when the call forwarding<br />

function <strong>is</strong> activated, these calls<br />

can only be accepted on the source<br />

terminal.<br />

If a call <strong>is</strong> to be forwarded “After delay”,<br />

it enters the queue. If the call<br />

has <strong>no</strong>t been answered before the<br />

delay period expires, it will be forwarded<br />

to the target terminal and<br />

can then be answered there.<br />

Pickup<br />

The functions “Pickup” (from a<br />

pickup group) and “Pickup selective”<br />

can be used together with queues.<br />

A user who accepts a call using<br />

“Pickup” or “Pickup selective” picks<br />

up the next call from the queue.<br />

Hunt Groups<br />

Hunt groups of the “parallel” type<br />

are usually used together with<br />

queues, with the queues of each telephone<br />

in the group being synchron<strong>is</strong>ed<br />

to each other. When a call to<br />

the number of the hunt group arrives,<br />

the call enters all parallel<br />

queues. If a call from one of the<br />

queues <strong>is</strong> answered, it <strong>is</strong> removed<br />

from all other parallel queues.<br />

118 Introduction Call Queue


Examples of Use<br />

Attendant Terminal for an<br />

Operator with Two<br />

System Telephones<br />

The operator switches all incoming<br />

calls and can either work on the<br />

OpenPhone 65 or the mobile terminal,<br />

the OpenPhone 25/27.<br />

Configuration<br />

■<br />

Configure the system access or<br />

access for multiple terminals under<br />

PBX Configuration: Ports:<br />

S 0 .<br />

■ Configure the OpenPhone 65<br />

and the RFP 21/23 under PBX<br />

Configuration: Ports: U pn .<br />

■<br />

Configure a trunk key for the<br />

OpenPhone 65 under PBX Configuration:<br />

System telephones.<br />

■ Configure the OpenPhone 25/27<br />

under PBX Configuration:<br />

Ports: DECT-PP and assign the<br />

OpenPhone 25/27 its own telephone<br />

number. Check in the<br />

OpenPhone 25/27.<br />

■<br />

■<br />

Under PBX Configuration: Call<br />

D<strong>is</strong>tribution: Incoming route all<br />

incoming calls to the number of<br />

the OpenPhone 65 trunk key.<br />

In the Configurator, create a<br />

new group called “Operators”<br />

under User Manager: User<br />

groups. Activate “Call queue”,<br />

“Call waiting protection” and<br />

“Call forwarding” for th<strong>is</strong> group<br />

and set the Dial out: External<br />

option appropriately.<br />

■ Create a user called “Operator 1”<br />

under User Manager: User. Assign<br />

th<strong>is</strong> user to the “Operators”<br />

user group. Assign the telephone<br />

numbers of the<br />

OpenPhone 65 trunk key and<br />

the number of the mobile<br />

OpenPhone 25/27 to th<strong>is</strong> user.<br />

■<br />

■<br />

Activate Call wait. prot.<br />

(call waiting protection) on both<br />

terminals in the Protection<br />

menu.<br />

Configure a function key on the<br />

OpenPhone 65 which activates/<br />

deactivates a “call forwarding<br />

immediately” to the telephone<br />

number of the mobile<br />

OpenPhone 25/27 (in the menu<br />

Call forwarding: Divert<br />

phone: Immediately).<br />

Use<br />

Incoming calls are routed to the<br />

OpenPhone 65 manned by the operator,<br />

who then puts the calls<br />

through. A queue <strong>is</strong> used so that callers<br />

do <strong>no</strong>t get a busy signal. The d<strong>is</strong>play<br />

on the OpenPhone 65 indicates<br />

Call Queue<br />

Examples of Use<br />

119


how many calls there are in the<br />

queue.<br />

If the operator wants to leave the<br />

workstation and take along the attendant<br />

terminal, call forwarding to<br />

the OpenPhone 25/27 <strong>is</strong> activated by<br />

pressing a function key. Calls which<br />

are in the OpenPhone 65 queue<br />

must still be answered on th<strong>is</strong> telephone.<br />

New calls are signalled on<br />

the mobile OpenPhone 25/27 or enter<br />

its queue, allowing the<br />

OpenPhone 25/27 to be used as a<br />

mobile attendant terminal.<br />

On returning to the workstation, the<br />

operator deactivates call forwarding<br />

by pressing a function key. Calls<br />

which are already in the queue are<br />

switched on the mobile<br />

OpenPhone 25/27. New calls are signalled<br />

on the OpenPhone 65 or enter<br />

its queue.<br />

Configuration<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

Configure the system access or<br />

access for multiple terminals under<br />

PBX Configuration: Ports:<br />

S 0 .<br />

Configure the three<br />

OpenPhone 65 telephones under<br />

PBX Configuration: Ports:<br />

U pn .<br />

Configure a trunk key with its<br />

own telephone number for each<br />

of the OpenPhone 65 telephones<br />

under PBX Configuration:<br />

System telephones.<br />

Configure a hunt group of the<br />

“parallel” type under PBX Configuration:<br />

Groups: Hunt<br />

Group, and include the three telephone<br />

numbers of the trunk<br />

keys in th<strong>is</strong> hunt group.<br />

Group of Three Attendant<br />

Terminals<br />

The attendant terminals switch all<br />

incoming calls. Incoming calls are<br />

admin<strong>is</strong>tered in queues. Depending<br />

on the number of arriving calls, one<br />

to three attendant terminals in th<strong>is</strong><br />

group are manned. The attendant<br />

terminals are each equipped with an<br />

OpenPhone 65.<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

Under PBX Configuration: Call<br />

D<strong>is</strong>tribution: Incoming route all<br />

incoming calls to the number of<br />

the hunt group.<br />

In the Configurator, create a<br />

new group called “Operators”<br />

under User Manager: User<br />

groups. Activate “Call queue”<br />

and “Call waiting protection” for<br />

th<strong>is</strong> group.<br />

In the User Manager, configure<br />

a user for each of the three operators<br />

and assign these settings<br />

to the user group called “Opera-<br />

120 Examples of Use Call Queue


■<br />

■<br />

tors”. Allocate each user the<br />

telephone number of the trunk<br />

key of their system telephone.<br />

Activate Call wait. prot.<br />

(call waiting protection) on all<br />

three terminals in the<br />

Protection menu.<br />

Program a function key with the<br />

function “Sign on/sign off from<br />

hunt group” on the three system<br />

telephones (in the menu<br />

Calls: Hunt group).<br />

Note: The last attendant terminal<br />

remaining in the hunt group should<br />

<strong>no</strong>t sign off, so that incoming calls<br />

can always be signalled to at least<br />

one terminal.<br />

Use<br />

Incoming calls are signalled in parallel<br />

to all signed-on attendant terminals.<br />

If the attendant terminals are<br />

busy, the incoming call joins the<br />

queue on each of the terminals in<br />

the hunt group. If one of the attendant<br />

terminals accepts a call from the<br />

queue, the call <strong>is</strong> removed from the<br />

queues of all the other attendant<br />

terminals. The d<strong>is</strong>play on each attendant<br />

terminal (OpenPhone 65)<br />

indicates how full the queue <strong>is</strong>.<br />

If attendants leave the terminal,<br />

they sign off from the hunt group by<br />

means of a function key. In contrast<br />

to Example 1, further calls do <strong>no</strong>t<br />

have to be processed after the sig<strong>no</strong>ff,<br />

as the calls are also reg<strong>is</strong>tered in<br />

the queues of the other signed-on<br />

attendant terminals.<br />

Call Queue<br />

Examples of Use<br />

121


Multi-Company Variant<br />

Communications systems are frequently<br />

shared by several companies.<br />

These companies want to<br />

jointly use the ex<strong>is</strong>ting infrastructure<br />

(e.g. the ex<strong>is</strong>ting lines and features<br />

of the system), while at the same<br />

time they w<strong>is</strong>h to organ<strong>is</strong>e and pay<br />

for their communication completely<br />

independently of one a<strong>no</strong>ther.<br />

<strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> “multi-company variant” can be<br />

implemented using the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> within a shared office,<br />

for example.<br />

In the multi-company variant, the<br />

companies are essentially completely<br />

independent of one a<strong>no</strong>ther.<br />

<strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> allows them to have their own<br />

trunk lines, which <strong>is</strong> useful for billing<br />

purposes. The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> hardware<br />

and software are used equally<br />

by all the companies, however. It <strong>is</strong><br />

possible to configure the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> for each company and<br />

define the extent to which the features<br />

of the system may be used.<br />

In brief, the features of the multicompany<br />

variant are as follows:<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

Each available trunk group <strong>is</strong><br />

uniquely assigned to a company<br />

so that incoming external calls<br />

can be transferred to the correct<br />

internal subscriber.<br />

For each company, every route<br />

can have its own code. For example,<br />

it <strong>is</strong> possible to activate<br />

different routes with the code<br />

“0” for different companies. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong><br />

enables separate charging for<br />

outgoing external calls, for example.<br />

An individual exchange (“operator”)<br />

can be set up for each company.<br />

Each company can maintain the<br />

communication data of its business<br />

partners in its own company<br />

telephone book.<br />

The charges can be billed individually<br />

for each company.<br />

■<br />

Up to five companies can be<br />

configured at the same time.<br />

■ Every user of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

<strong>is</strong> assigned to a company.<br />

122 Multi-Company Variant


Configuring the Multi-Company Variant<br />

The multi-company variant can be<br />

comm<strong>is</strong>sioned and configured by<br />

the system admin<strong>is</strong>trator of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> without any major effort.<br />

In the multi-company variant,<br />

the communications system behaves<br />

in exactly the same way as the<br />

single-company variant. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> <strong>is</strong> particularly<br />

of interest to users who<br />

want to expand their own system<br />

and at the same time operate it in a<br />

group.<br />

The process in brief:<br />

1. The feature must be activated<br />

(see Activating the Multi-Company<br />

Variant starting on<br />

<strong>page</strong> 123).<br />

2. The required companies must be<br />

set up (see Configuring and Managing<br />

Companies starting on<br />

<strong>page</strong> 124).<br />

3. The users of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

are assigned to the individual<br />

companies (see Assigning Users<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 124).<br />

4. In order that the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

can transfer incoming calls to<br />

the corresponding company (or<br />

its staff) correctly, the ex<strong>is</strong>ting<br />

trunk groups must be uniquely<br />

assigned to the companies (see<br />

Assigning Trunk Groups starting<br />

on <strong>page</strong> 125).<br />

5. In the case of outgoing external<br />

calls, the lines via which the<br />

members of a company can<br />

make a call must be defined (see<br />

Allocating Routing Codes starting<br />

on <strong>page</strong> 125).<br />

6. An exchange must be set up for<br />

each company so that the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> can correctly<br />

process statuses in which a call<br />

should be routed to the exchange<br />

(see Configuring the<br />

Company Exchange starting on<br />

<strong>page</strong> 125).<br />

Activating the Multi-<br />

Company Variant<br />

To be able to configure several companies<br />

in the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>, the<br />

“Multi-company variant”<br />

(<strong>OpenCom</strong>pany 45) program package<br />

must first be activated. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> <strong>is</strong><br />

done in the Configurator on the<br />

Web console in the<br />

SYS Configuration: Licences menu.<br />

The licence confirmation you received<br />

with the program package<br />

contains all the information you require<br />

about how to proceed.<br />

Only when th<strong>is</strong> package has been activated<br />

are the fields required to<br />

configure the multi-company variant<br />

available in the other menus of<br />

the Web console, for example in the<br />

User Manager: User groups menu<br />

Multi-Company Variant<br />

Configuring the Multi-Company Variant<br />

123


or in the PBX Configuration:<br />

Trunks menu.<br />

Configuring and Managing<br />

Companies<br />

Up to five companies can be configured<br />

in the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. By default,<br />

one company with the name<br />

“Company 1” <strong>is</strong> predefined. All configuration<br />

settings, e.g. in the user<br />

groups or in the trunk group configuration,<br />

apply to th<strong>is</strong> predefined default<br />

company if <strong>no</strong>t other company<br />

has been selected.<br />

Companies are set up and managed<br />

in the PBX Configuration: Companies<br />

menu:<br />

■<br />

■<br />

A new company <strong>is</strong> created in th<strong>is</strong><br />

menu using the command New.<br />

Each company can be given a<br />

name up to 20 characters long.<br />

<strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> name <strong>is</strong> then d<strong>is</strong>played in all<br />

configuration dialogue boxes in<br />

which company-specific settings<br />

can be defined.<br />

In th<strong>is</strong> menu a company can be<br />

deleted again using the command<br />

Delete. If a company <strong>is</strong><br />

deleted which <strong>is</strong> still used at<br />

other places (in the user groups,<br />

for example), the respective<br />

configuration <strong>is</strong> changed to the<br />

default company.<br />

■<br />

The name of the default company<br />

can be changed, but the<br />

default company itself can<strong>no</strong>t<br />

be deleted.<br />

Assigning Users<br />

For each user you must define the<br />

company to which they belong. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong><br />

assignment determines, for example,<br />

which company telephone book<br />

the user has access to and which<br />

company-specific configuration data<br />

apply to them.<br />

As the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> manages users<br />

in groups, the assignment “user ><br />

company” <strong>is</strong> also establ<strong>is</strong>hed th<strong>is</strong><br />

way. The company to which each<br />

user group belongs must be defined<br />

for each group. A user group can<br />

only belong to one company, i.e. <strong>no</strong>t<br />

to several. However, a company can<br />

have several user groups. It <strong>is</strong> therefore<br />

possible, in the same way as in<br />

the entire system, to allocate a range<br />

of author<strong>is</strong>ation rights for the use<br />

and configuration of features for<br />

each company.<br />

When setting up a new user group<br />

(in the User Manager menu), you<br />

will find that the default company <strong>is</strong><br />

predefined; a<strong>no</strong>ther company can<br />

be assigned as long as <strong>no</strong> other companies<br />

have been set up.<br />

124 Configuring the Multi-Company Variant Multi-Company Variant


Assigning Trunk Groups<br />

Connections of the same type and in<br />

the same direction are arranged in a<br />

trunk group (e.g. S 0 multi-terminal<br />

connections). To be able to correctly<br />

transfer incoming calls to the members<br />

of the configured companies<br />

(the users) via the lines of a certain<br />

trunk group of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>,<br />

each of the available trunk groups<br />

must be assigned to one of the companies.<br />

<strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> <strong>is</strong> necessary to be able<br />

to transfer incoming external calls to<br />

the correct company exchange in<br />

cases where the called internal subscriber<br />

can<strong>no</strong>t be reached (“Connection<br />

to Operator”), for example.<br />

The assignment of trunk groups to<br />

companies <strong>is</strong> done in the<br />

PBX Configuration: Trunks: Bundle<br />

menu.<br />

For outgoing external calls which users<br />

set up via the lines of their company’s<br />

trunk group, the assignment<br />

of the trunk group to the company <strong>is</strong><br />

irrelevant: the charges are assigned<br />

according to the “source” principle.<br />

Charges are billed to the company to<br />

which the user belongs who set up<br />

the connection. The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

recogn<strong>is</strong>es th<strong>is</strong> on the bas<strong>is</strong> of the<br />

assignment between user groups<br />

and companies and on the bas<strong>is</strong> of<br />

the routing code with which a line of<br />

the trunk group was seized. For<br />

more information, please see the<br />

following section.<br />

Allocating Routing Codes<br />

Routes are used for automatic and<br />

selective seizure of trunk groups or<br />

connections for external calls. It <strong>is</strong><br />

possible to seize a route by predialling<br />

a code.<br />

In the PBX Configuration: Trunks:<br />

Route menu, you can define which<br />

company can seize each route. An individual<br />

code for the seizure <strong>is</strong> allocated<br />

per route for each company.<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> ensures that during<br />

configuration <strong>no</strong> seizure code <strong>is</strong><br />

allocated twice (for two different<br />

routes) for each company. If during<br />

configuration of a route <strong>no</strong> code <strong>is</strong><br />

allocated for one of the configured<br />

companies, the route concerned<br />

can<strong>no</strong>t be seized by the members<br />

(user groups) of th<strong>is</strong> company.<br />

Configuring the Company<br />

Exchange<br />

An internal telephone number must<br />

be set up for each company which<br />

represents the exchange, i.e. “the<br />

operator”. The calls to specific extensions<br />

arriving at the exchange are<br />

routed to th<strong>is</strong> number, for example,<br />

as are all external calls where the<br />

called subscriber (a user who belongs<br />

to th<strong>is</strong> company) can<strong>no</strong>t be<br />

reached, as in the case of a timeout.<br />

Multi-Company Variant<br />

Configuring the Multi-Company Variant<br />

125


A company exchange <strong>is</strong> set up in the<br />

PBX Configuration: System: Operator<br />

menu. In th<strong>is</strong> menu, you can<br />

specify an internal telephone<br />

number for each company and time<br />

group which then represents the exchange<br />

for th<strong>is</strong> company.<br />

Working with the Multi-Company<br />

Variant<br />

All the features of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

which the users may already be familiar<br />

with from the single-company<br />

variant are available in the multicompany<br />

variant. These features can<br />

be used to the same extent and can<br />

be used in exactly the same way.<br />

The following section describes the<br />

features additionally available to the<br />

users in the multi-company variant.<br />

Company Telephone Book<br />

An individual company telephone<br />

book can be created for each company.<br />

In addition to th<strong>is</strong>, “personal”<br />

and “central” telephone books ex<strong>is</strong>t:<br />

■<br />

■<br />

A personal telephone book <strong>is</strong><br />

available for each user.<br />

The central telephone book can<br />

be used across the companies by<br />

all users of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

The company telephone book <strong>is</strong> a<br />

central telephone book for the<br />

whole company. It <strong>is</strong> only available<br />

to the users/user groups who are assigned<br />

to th<strong>is</strong> company. You can also<br />

define whether the members of<br />

each user group may edit the company<br />

telephone book or <strong>no</strong>t.<br />

The company telephone book <strong>is</strong><br />

treated exactly the same way on the<br />

system terminals as the other types<br />

of telephone books. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> means that<br />

the entries l<strong>is</strong>ted in the personal,<br />

central and company telephone<br />

books are d<strong>is</strong>played on the system<br />

phones at the same time.<br />

Users can also use the telephone<br />

book of their company with the<br />

OpenCTI 50 Web applications and<br />

phone book, assuming they are author<strong>is</strong>ed<br />

to use these applications.<br />

In addition, it <strong>is</strong> also possible to assign<br />

a user group with the author<strong>is</strong>ation<br />

to edit foreign company tele-<br />

126 Working with the Multi-Company Variant Multi-Company Variant


phone books. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> author<strong>is</strong>ation <strong>is</strong><br />

useful if members of th<strong>is</strong> group - e.g.<br />

the “Admin<strong>is</strong>trators” - service the<br />

entire system. Foreign telephone<br />

books can only be edited in the Configurator<br />

in the Phone Book menu.<br />

The number of entries in a company<br />

telephone book <strong>is</strong> unrestricted. The<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> can manage up to<br />

2,000 entries in all telephone books<br />

(in the central, personal and company<br />

telephone books).<br />

Making Calls Between<br />

Companies<br />

All users of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> can<br />

make internal calls to one a<strong>no</strong>ther,<br />

irrespective of which company they<br />

belong to. Calls between users from<br />

the different companies are therefore<br />

<strong>no</strong>t subject to any restrictions.<br />

Billing Charges per<br />

Company<br />

In the Costs Web application you can<br />

output the charges for each company.<br />

Users who are author<strong>is</strong>ed to use th<strong>is</strong><br />

application can view the charges for<br />

each company.<br />

Multi-Company Variant<br />

Working with the Multi-Company Variant<br />

127


Configuring the PC Software<br />

Further possibilities of use can be<br />

implemented on a workstation PC<br />

with the Windows operating system<br />

by installing drivers and programs.<br />

You can find the installation programs<br />

required for th<strong>is</strong> on the system<br />

CD that comes with the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

Proceed as follows to install extra<br />

software:<br />

1. Log on under Windows NT or<br />

Windows 2000/XP as the admin<strong>is</strong>trator.<br />

2. Insert the system CD.<br />

If your PC <strong>is</strong> suitably configured,<br />

the CD will start automatically.<br />

Otherw<strong>is</strong>e select “Run” from the<br />

Start menu. Click on the<br />

“Browse” button to look for the<br />

program “cd_start.exe” on the<br />

CD. Then confirm th<strong>is</strong> with<br />

“Open” and “OK”.<br />

3. Choose the required option from<br />

the start mask and follow the<br />

program instructions.<br />

Further instructions for various options<br />

that are available are given below.<br />

Setting up TAPI<br />

With a TAPI (Telephony Application<br />

Programming Interface) you can operate<br />

a CTI application (computer telephony<br />

integration). Here, the CTI<br />

application uses the services of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> with the help of the<br />

TAPI driver installed on a Windows<br />

PC.<br />

Requirements<br />

You require an active IP network<br />

connection between the PC and the<br />

telephone system. Refer to the chapter<br />

entitled Configuration under Windows<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 73 if you have<br />

<strong>no</strong>t yet establ<strong>is</strong>hed an IP network<br />

connection. CTI functions can be<br />

used only in conjunction with system<br />

telephones.<br />

You must therefore have configured<br />

at least one user for a system telephone.<br />

In addition, you require a<br />

TAPI 2.1-compatible CTI application,<br />

for example the Phone Dialer included<br />

in the Windows operating<br />

system.<br />

128 Setting up TAPI Configuring the PC Software


Installing the TAPI Driver<br />

1. Call up the start mask from the<br />

system CD (see Configuring the<br />

PC Software on <strong>page</strong> 128).<br />

2. Select “Software, TAPI Service<br />

Provider” from the start mask<br />

and follow the program instructions.<br />

Configuring the TAPI Connection<br />

Note: Under Windows NT or Windows<br />

2000/XP you should log on as<br />

the user for whom you want to configure<br />

the TAPI connection.<br />

1. In the Start menu, select “Settings<br />

> Control Panel”. Doubleclick<br />

on the “Telephony” icon<br />

(“Phone and Modem Options”<br />

icon under Windows 2000/XP).<br />

2. Change to the “Telephony Drivers”<br />

tab (“Advanced Options”<br />

tab under Windows 2000/XP).<br />

3. From the l<strong>is</strong>t of installed driver<br />

software, select “<strong>OpenCom</strong> 100<br />

Service Provider” and click on<br />

“Configure”.<br />

4. In the following dialogue you<br />

will find a l<strong>is</strong>t with the configured<br />

connections for the user<br />

who <strong>is</strong> currently logged on. Click<br />

on “New”.<br />

5. In the following dialogue you<br />

provide information for the new<br />

connection. In the “Connection<br />

name” box you can enter a descriptive<br />

name for the connection.<br />

In the “CTI server” box you<br />

must enter the DNS name or the<br />

IP address of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

Using the “…” button you can<br />

search for th<strong>is</strong> in the LAN. In the<br />

boxes “Username” and “Password”<br />

you enter the user data of<br />

one of the users configured on<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> user<br />

must be allocated a system telephone.<br />

Confirm your entry with<br />

“OK”.<br />

6. The new connection <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>w configured.<br />

Close the opened dialogues<br />

with “OK” and “Close”.<br />

Testing the TAPI Function<br />

1. In the Start menu, select “Programs<br />

> Accessories > Communication”<br />

and then start the program<br />

called “Phone Dialer”.<br />

Under Windows XP the “Phone<br />

Dialer” <strong>is</strong> started indirect by using<br />

the dialling function of the<br />

“Address book” (can be found in<br />

the start menu under<br />

“Programs >Accessories”). A<br />

manual start of the program file<br />

“Dialer.exe” in the “C:\Program<br />

files\Windows NT” folder <strong>is</strong> possible<br />

also.<br />

2. In the “Tools” menu, select the<br />

item “Connect using...” to select<br />

the system telephone that <strong>is</strong> to<br />

Configuring the PC Software<br />

Setting up TAPI<br />

129


use the CTI application. Under<br />

Windows 2000/XP you select the<br />

item “Options” from the “Edit”<br />

menu. In the “Lines” tab you<br />

then select the system telephone<br />

from the “Phone calls”<br />

l<strong>is</strong>t.<br />

3. Enter a telephone number in the<br />

“Number” box and confirm with<br />

“Dial.” Under Windows 2000/XP<br />

you first click on the “Dial” icon<br />

and in the subsequent dialogue<br />

activate “Phone call”.<br />

4. The number you entered <strong>is</strong> d<strong>is</strong>played<br />

on the selected system<br />

telephone. Lift the receiver to<br />

start dialling.<br />

Note: If the “Phone Dialer” program<br />

<strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t installed, you will have to<br />

install it. To do th<strong>is</strong>, you open the<br />

“Control Panel” and click on “Software”.<br />

In the “Windows Setup” tab<br />

you activate the “Connections” component.<br />

Setting up NET CAPI<br />

With a CAPI driver (common application<br />

programming interface) Windows<br />

programs are able to access<br />

services and functions of an ISDN<br />

card. With a network-based CAPI,<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> allows the use of<br />

ISDN functions also by PCs in which<br />

<strong>no</strong> ISDN card <strong>is</strong> integrated.<br />

Requirements<br />

You require an active IP network<br />

connection between the PC and the<br />

telephone system. Refer to the chapter<br />

Configuration under Windows<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 73 if you have <strong>no</strong>t<br />

yet establ<strong>is</strong>hed an IP network connection.<br />

Please <strong>no</strong>te: Before installing the<br />

CAPI driver for the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>, any<br />

ex<strong>is</strong>tent ISDN card must be removed<br />

and any CAPI drivers on your PC must<br />

be de-installed.<br />

Installing the NET CAPI driver<br />

1. Call up the start mask from the<br />

system CD (see Configuring the<br />

PC Software on <strong>page</strong> 128).<br />

2. Select “Software, NET CAPI<br />

Driver” from the start mask and<br />

follow the program instructions.<br />

Configuring the NET CAPI Driver<br />

The NET CAPI driver requires an extra<br />

internal number so that the “virtual<br />

ISDN card” on the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> can<br />

be addressed:<br />

130 Setting up NET CAPI Configuring the PC Software


1. Go to the Configurator, NET<br />

Configuration: Connections:<br />

CAPI menu. Click on Change.<br />

2. Activate the Status check box.<br />

Enter at least one unassigned,<br />

internal number in the boxes<br />

under Parameters. Confirm your<br />

entry with Assign.<br />

3. Go to the Configurator, User<br />

Manager: User menu. Select<br />

one of the users shown. Enter<br />

the number just assigned in one<br />

of the boxes No. 1 to No. 10.<br />

Confirm your entry with Apply.<br />

4. If it <strong>is</strong> to be possible to call the<br />

“virtual ISDN card” externally, or<br />

if external calls are to be possible,<br />

the number must be included<br />

in call d<strong>is</strong>tribution (Configurator,<br />

PBX Configuration:<br />

Call D<strong>is</strong>tribution menu).<br />

5. After installing the NET CAPI<br />

driver, you will find an extra icon<br />

on the right side of the Windows<br />

Start bar. Click on th<strong>is</strong> icon with<br />

the right mouse key. Select the<br />

Log-on command from the<br />

menu.<br />

Note: In the subsequent dialogue<br />

you must log on NET CAPI first with<br />

the user (user name and password)<br />

for which you configured the CAPI telephone<br />

number in the User Manager<br />

(see Step 3).<br />

You will find further information on<br />

the working of the NET CAPI driver<br />

and CAPI application programs on<br />

the system CD.<br />

Using the Systray D<strong>is</strong>play<br />

You can configure a systray d<strong>is</strong>play<br />

for the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> to appear in<br />

the information area of the Start bar<br />

of a workstation. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> systray d<strong>is</strong>play<br />

constantly shows you whether an<br />

ISP, an RAS or a LAN-to-LAN connection<br />

<strong>is</strong> active. It <strong>is</strong> also possible to<br />

d<strong>is</strong>play the current occupancy of the<br />

trunk lines.<br />

Requirements<br />

To use the systray d<strong>is</strong>play, you must<br />

first install TAPI; see Setting up TAPI<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 128.<br />

Please <strong>no</strong>te: The systray d<strong>is</strong>play<br />

requires a current version of TAPI. If<br />

you are using TAPI from an earlier<br />

version of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>, you<br />

must first install the newer version<br />

from the system CD.<br />

Configuring the PC Software<br />

Using the Systray D<strong>is</strong>play<br />

131


Installing the systray d<strong>is</strong>play<br />

1. Call up the start mask of the system<br />

CD (see Configuring the PC<br />

Software on <strong>page</strong> 128).<br />

2. From the start mask, select<br />

“Software, install systray”. Follow<br />

the program instructions.<br />

3. Start the copied program by<br />

“Start > Run” and the configuration<br />

dialogue <strong>is</strong> d<strong>is</strong>played. Select<br />

one of the entries d<strong>is</strong>played under<br />

Ex<strong>is</strong>ting PBXs. Enter your<br />

user name and password in the<br />

boxes under Log-on.<br />

4. If you activate the Autostart<br />

check box, you will see the<br />

systray d<strong>is</strong>play even after restarting<br />

your PC.<br />

5. Confirm the entries in the configuration<br />

dialogue with OK and<br />

the systray d<strong>is</strong>play logs on for<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

6. Right-click on the<br />

systray d<strong>is</strong>play in<br />

the Start bar. Select<br />

Configuration to call up the<br />

configuration dialogue. Select<br />

Network Connections or Trunk<br />

Lines to produce a status dialogue.<br />

Browser for OpenCTI<br />

You can simplify the daily use of the<br />

OpenCTI using the Web browser especially<br />

adapted for the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. Each time the workstation<br />

<strong>is</strong> restarted, th<strong>is</strong> browser program<br />

can automatically start and log<br />

you in. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> means the OpenCTI <strong>is</strong> always<br />

operational and can be accessed<br />

using the icon in the information<br />

area of the task bar.<br />

Installing the browser for<br />

OpenCTI<br />

1. Call up the start mask from the<br />

system CD (see Configuring the<br />

PC Software on <strong>page</strong> 128).<br />

2. From the start mask, select<br />

“Software, Install browser for<br />

OpenCTI”. Follow the program<br />

instructions.<br />

3. Follow the program instructions.<br />

132 Browser for OpenCTI Configuring the PC Software


After installing the browser, there <strong>is</strong><br />

a new menu entry in the Windows<br />

start menu under Programs:<br />

OpenCTI Browser.<br />

Further information can be found in<br />

the online help of the browser program.<br />

To view th<strong>is</strong>, click the top left<br />

corner of the program window on<br />

the system menu icon or on the icon<br />

in the information area of the task<br />

bar. Select the Readme command.<br />

Synchron<strong>is</strong>ing the PC Clock<br />

With the network service SNTP (simple<br />

network time protocol) it <strong>is</strong> possible<br />

to synchron<strong>is</strong>e the internal<br />

clock of a PC with the time of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

Requirements<br />

You must enter the time zone so that<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> can calculate the<br />

time of the internal clock back to the<br />

GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) required<br />

for SNTP:<br />

1. Go to the Configurator, SYS<br />

Configuration: System menu.<br />

Click on Change.<br />

2. Under Internet time (SNTP), enter<br />

the Time zone for which the<br />

time of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> applies<br />

and whether summer time<br />

<strong>is</strong> allowed for. Confirm th<strong>is</strong> with<br />

Assign.<br />

Configuring SNTP<br />

For various operating systems, you<br />

can use one of the numerous SNTP<br />

programs offered for downloading<br />

on the Internet. Configure the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> as an SNTP server for<br />

such programs.<br />

SNTP with Windows 2000<br />

Here you configure the SNTP server<br />

as follows:<br />

1. Log on as the admin<strong>is</strong>trator.<br />

Start the “Command Prompt”<br />

under “Start > Programs > Accessories”.<br />

2. Enter the command line “net<br />

time /setsntp:192.168.99.254”.<br />

Confirm with the enter key. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong><br />

command changes the setting<br />

for the SNTP server address in<br />

the system reg<strong>is</strong>try. Close the<br />

command line.<br />

3. Open the “Services” dialogue<br />

under “Start > Settings > Control<br />

Panel > Admin<strong>is</strong>tration”. Set<br />

the autostart type of the “Windows<br />

Timer” service to “Automatic”.<br />

Start the service with<br />

“Process > Start”. Every time the<br />

Configuring the PC Software<br />

Synchron<strong>is</strong>ing the PC Clock<br />

133


service starts, the PC clock <strong>is</strong><br />

synchron<strong>is</strong>ed with the time of<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

Please <strong>no</strong>te: In a Windows domain<br />

network, the PDC server (primary<br />

domain controller) should automatically<br />

assume the function of the<br />

timer.<br />

SNTP with Windows XP<br />

Here you configure the SNTP server<br />

by double-clicking on the time in the<br />

Start bar. Enter the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> as<br />

the “server” in the “Internet time”<br />

tab.<br />

Address Queries using LDAP<br />

You can search the data of the central<br />

telephone book of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> from a workstation in<br />

the LAN using LDAP (Lightweight Directory<br />

Access Protocol”). When configuring<br />

an LDAP-enabled program,<br />

specify the IP address of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> as the address of the<br />

LDAP server.<br />

LDAP with Outlook Express<br />

You can configure and operate the<br />

LDAP directory service with Outlook<br />

Express TM , a Microsoft TM e-mail program,<br />

as follows:<br />

1. Call up the Accounts command<br />

in the Tools menu.<br />

The Internet Accounts dialogue<br />

box will then open.<br />

2. Click on Add. Select the Directory<br />

Service command from the<br />

pop-up menu.<br />

The Internet Connection Wizard<br />

dialogue box for Internet access<br />

will then open.<br />

3. Under Internet directory<br />

(LDAP) server, enter the address<br />

of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. It <strong>is</strong><br />

<strong>no</strong>t necessary to log in to the<br />

LDAP server. Click twice on<br />

Next. Then click on Fin<strong>is</strong>h.<br />

4. Check the function. In the Edit<br />

menu, call up the Find: People<br />

command.<br />

The Find: People dialogue box<br />

will then open.<br />

5. In the Look in l<strong>is</strong>t, select the entry<br />

with the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> address.<br />

Enter a user in the Name<br />

input field, Admin<strong>is</strong>trator for example.<br />

Then click on Find <strong>no</strong>w.<br />

134 Address Queries using LDAP Configuring the PC Software


The l<strong>is</strong>t of entries found should<br />

<strong>no</strong>w d<strong>is</strong>play the address from<br />

the central telephone book.<br />

Note: Only users can be found for<br />

whom an internal telephone number<br />

has been configured.<br />

USB DECT Box on the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

General Information<br />

The USB DECT Box provides a PC with<br />

a wireless ISDN data connection<br />

(DECT). The Box <strong>is</strong> connected to the<br />

PC via the USB interface and uses the<br />

RFP 21/23 to create a connection to<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> and its network,<br />

to the telephone network and to the<br />

Internet.<br />

Note: Up-to-date information on<br />

the USB DECT Box can be found at<br />

http://www.detewe.de/.<br />

Installation and<br />

Configuration<br />

1. Connect the RFP 21/23 to a free<br />

U pn interface on the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. Instructions on<br />

how to do th<strong>is</strong> can be found in<br />

the section MS+UPN2-8 starting<br />

on <strong>page</strong> 66.<br />

2. Configure the RFP 21/23 in the<br />

Configurator, using the PBX<br />

Configuration: Ports: U pn<br />

menu.<br />

3. Install the software of the USB<br />

DECT Box and then connect the<br />

USB DECT Box to your PC. Further<br />

information on th<strong>is</strong> can be<br />

found in the corresponding<br />

chapter of the “USB DECT Box”<br />

manual (which <strong>is</strong> included with<br />

the USB DECT Box).<br />

4. Create a new DECT device of the<br />

type USB DECT Box in the Configurator<br />

(menu PBX Configuration:<br />

Ports: DECT-PP) and assign<br />

a telephone number for the<br />

data port.<br />

5. Check the USB DECT Box in. Further<br />

information on how to do<br />

th<strong>is</strong> can be found in the corresponding<br />

chapter of the “USB<br />

DECT Box” manual and in the<br />

online help provided in the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

6. Assign a user to the telephone<br />

numbers of the USB DECT Box in<br />

the Configurator (menu User<br />

Manager: User).<br />

Configuring the PC Software USB DECT Box on the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

135


Tip: We recommend that you create<br />

the Internet access indirectly via<br />

the RAS access of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

If you w<strong>is</strong>h to use the USB Box to dial<br />

up an Internet provider directly, follow<br />

the instructions in the corresponding<br />

chapter of the “USB DECT<br />

Box” manual. If you do th<strong>is</strong>, you can<br />

omit the remaining steps.<br />

Please <strong>no</strong>te: The direct dial-up<br />

of an Internet provider offers <strong>no</strong><br />

safety mechan<strong>is</strong>ms, whereas accessing<br />

the Internet via the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

protects your network/PC by means<br />

of filter l<strong>is</strong>ts.<br />

7. In the Configurator (menu User<br />

Manager: User), assign the user<br />

of the USB DECT Box to a user<br />

group which <strong>is</strong> allowed to use<br />

RAS access.<br />

8. Configure the Internet access in<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> Configurator<br />

(menu NET Configuration: Connections:<br />

ISP). You can edit/create<br />

suitable filter l<strong>is</strong>ts for the Internet<br />

access in the NET<br />

Configuration: Safe Access<br />

menu.<br />

Box” manual. Do <strong>no</strong>t enter the<br />

provider data, though. Instead,<br />

use the internal number of the<br />

RAS access and the user name<br />

and password of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> user.<br />

Detailed information can be found in<br />

the Internet starting on <strong>page</strong> 151<br />

section of the Frequently Asked Questions<br />

chapter. The information concerning<br />

the Internet functionality of<br />

the OpenPhone 25/27 also applies to<br />

the USB DECT Box.<br />

Technical Data for<br />

Operation on the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

■<br />

■<br />

Data transm<strong>is</strong>sion with RAS<br />

access / Internet access via the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>: Up to 64 kbit/s<br />

gross<br />

Data transm<strong>is</strong>sion with direct<br />

dial-up of a provider: Up to 128<br />

kbit/s gross<br />

9. Configure the RAS access in the<br />

NET Configuration: Connections:<br />

RAS menu.<br />

10. Configure the communication<br />

network. To do th<strong>is</strong>, follow the<br />

instructions in the corresponding<br />

chapter of the “USB DECT<br />

136 USB DECT Box on the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> Configuring the PC Software


Configuration Guide<br />

The Configuration Guide contains a<br />

series of flowcharts that will help<br />

you to plan the configuration of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> and guide you<br />

through the necessary settings step<br />

by step, focusing on the network settings.<br />

The individual charts are summar<strong>is</strong>ed<br />

below:<br />

Note: Settings for mail and ISP and<br />

RAS access are only possible by releasing<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> IP package<br />

on the Web console Configurator<br />

in the SYS Configuration: Licences<br />

menu.<br />

■<br />

Overview: <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> chart gives you<br />

an overview of the initial configuration<br />

of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

Configuring LAN-to-LAN Settings:<br />

<strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> chart guides you<br />

through the configuration of the<br />

LAN-to-LAN settings.<br />

Configuring E-Mail: <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> diagram<br />

tells you how to create the<br />

requirements needed for configuring<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> e-mail<br />

access function.<br />

Configuring E-Mail Access: <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong><br />

overview provides instructions<br />

on configuring the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> e-mail access<br />

server.<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

Configuring PBX Ports: <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong><br />

chart shows you the necessary<br />

steps for configuring ports and<br />

terminals.<br />

Configuring Easy Access: <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong><br />

chart guides you through TCP/IP<br />

settings for the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

Configuring ISP Settings: These<br />

instructions support you in configuring<br />

the Internet access.<br />

Configuring RAS Settings: <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong><br />

chart guides you through the<br />

configuration of the RAS settings.<br />

Configuration Guide<br />

137


Overview<br />

Yes<br />

Ethernet network<br />

(LAN) ex<strong>is</strong>ts?<br />

Yes<br />

No<br />

Cross-connected ethernet<br />

cable available?<br />

No<br />

Connect the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> and the<br />

configuration PC to the network<br />

Connect the configuration PC to<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> LAN port.<br />

Enable DHCP.<br />

Connect the configuration PC to<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> COM port.<br />

Generate the Dialup Networking<br />

entry with “occonfig”.<br />

Start the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> configuration<br />

service via your Web browser.<br />

Enter the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> address, for<br />

example “http://192.168.99.254”.<br />

User Manager<br />

PBX Configuration<br />

Create the user groups and users.<br />

Set the system data. Select the access type. Connect<br />

the S 0 , U pn and analogue devices and configure them.<br />

Configure the call d<strong>is</strong>tribution scheme.<br />

Configure the Least Cost Routing<br />

function: zones, network providers<br />

and holidays.<br />

Configure <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

Least Cost Routing function?<br />

Yes<br />

LCR Configuration<br />

No<br />

Configure <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

network functions?<br />

Yes<br />

Enter the licence code for releasing<br />

the IP package in the “System<br />

Configuration: Licences” menu.<br />

Easy Access Configuration<br />

Dial in (RAS)?<br />

Yes<br />

RAS Configuration<br />

No<br />

No<br />

Connection (LAN)?<br />

Yes<br />

LAN-LAN Configuration<br />

No<br />

Internet?<br />

Yes<br />

ISP Configuration<br />

No<br />

E-mail?<br />

Yes<br />

E-Mail Configuration<br />

No<br />

Save data<br />

Fin<strong>is</strong>hed<br />

Flowchart: Overview<br />

138 Overview Configuration Guide


PBX Ports<br />

Define the access type<br />

Set the access type (multiterminal<br />

access and/or system access).<br />

Define the external<br />

S 0 interfaces<br />

Set the external S 0 interfaces and<br />

enter the telephone numbers<br />

assigned by your network provider.<br />

Do you have ISDN terminals<br />

that you w<strong>is</strong>h to operate on<br />

an S 0 interface?<br />

S 0 terminals<br />

Yes<br />

Define the internal S 0<br />

interfaces<br />

Set the internal S 0 interfaces<br />

and enter the internal<br />

telephone numbers.<br />

No<br />

Do you want to operate<br />

system telephones or<br />

DECT terminals?<br />

U pn terminals<br />

Yes<br />

Configure the<br />

U pn interfaces<br />

Enter the U pn interfaces<br />

and enter the internal<br />

telephone numbers.<br />

DECT terminals<br />

Do you want to operate<br />

DECT terminals on the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>?<br />

No<br />

No<br />

Yes<br />

Configure the DECT<br />

terminals<br />

Check in the DECT terminals<br />

and enter the internal<br />

telephone numbers.<br />

Do you want to operate<br />

analogue terminals<br />

(e.g. a fax machine)?<br />

Analogue terminals<br />

Yes<br />

Configure the<br />

a/b interfaces<br />

Set the analogue interfaces<br />

and enter the internal<br />

telephone numbers.<br />

No<br />

Do you want to use a<br />

sensor contact on the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> (e.g. for<br />

a door opener)?<br />

Sensor<br />

Yes<br />

Configure the sensor<br />

Enter the internal telephone<br />

numbers for the time<br />

groups of the sensor.<br />

No<br />

Do you want to run the<br />

OpenCount program?<br />

COM<br />

Yes<br />

Configure the COM<br />

interface<br />

Select the “connection<br />

data” option.<br />

No<br />

Fin<strong>is</strong>hed<br />

Flowchart: Configuring the PBX Ports<br />

Configuration Guide<br />

PBX Ports<br />

139


Easy Access<br />

Do you have a computer network?<br />

LAN<br />

No<br />

Fin<strong>is</strong>hed<br />

Yes<br />

Host name<br />

Assign a name to<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

Do you have a DHCP<br />

server in your network?<br />

DHCP<br />

Yes<br />

The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

takes the settings from<br />

your DHCP server<br />

No<br />

Activate the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

DHCP server.<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

DHCP server<br />

Ask your network admin<strong>is</strong>trator for the<br />

address range for the RAS accesses. For<br />

th<strong>is</strong> purpose, your admin<strong>is</strong>trator must<br />

reserve an IP address range for the RAS<br />

accesses.<br />

Enter the Ethernet-IP configuration<br />

for the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

Enter the address range of the client<br />

computers in your network.<br />

IP address<br />

Network mask<br />

Gateway address<br />

DHCP adresses<br />

Domain name<br />

Client computers are informed of th<strong>is</strong><br />

gateway address via DHCP as a gateway.<br />

Enter the domain name. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> name <strong>is</strong><br />

transferred to the client computers as<br />

the domain via DHCP.<br />

Do you have a DNS server<br />

in your network?<br />

Specify the IP address of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

under “Domain Name Server”. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> <strong>is</strong><br />

transferred as the DNS server to the client<br />

computers via DHCP.<br />

DNS<br />

No<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> as<br />

DNS server<br />

Yes<br />

Reg<strong>is</strong>ter internal DNS<br />

Specify the IP address of<br />

your internal DNS server<br />

under “Domain Name<br />

Server”. <strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> <strong>is</strong> transferred<br />

as the DNS server to the<br />

client computers via DHCP.<br />

Enter the address range<br />

for the RAS accesses.<br />

PPP addresses<br />

Fin<strong>is</strong>hed<br />

Flowchart: Configuring Easy Access<br />

140 Easy Access Configuration Guide


ISP Settings<br />

Do you want to configure<br />

a new Internet provider?<br />

Your own ISP<br />

No<br />

Select a provider from<br />

the l<strong>is</strong>t<br />

Enter your provider's<br />

dial-in data.<br />

“SYS Configuration: System:<br />

Country” = “German”?<br />

No<br />

Yes<br />

T-Online<br />

Yes<br />

Select one of the<br />

default providers in<br />

“NET Configuration:<br />

Connections: ISP”.<br />

Provider-New: Provider,<br />

Telephone Number,<br />

User Name and Password<br />

T-Online: Telephone number,<br />

Access identification, T-Online<br />

number, Co-user number<br />

and Password<br />

Specify the IP address of<br />

the DNS in the Internet.<br />

Specify a standard POP server<br />

and a standard SMTP server.<br />

Specify the maximum time of<br />

inactivity after which the connection<br />

to the ISP <strong>is</strong> cleared down.<br />

Domain Name Server<br />

Mail input server and<br />

mail output server<br />

Maximum idle time<br />

Activate the status and<br />

select the provider<br />

Configure T-Online in “NET:<br />

Configuration: Connections: ISP:<br />

Provider”. You will obtain the access<br />

data when you reg<strong>is</strong>ter.<br />

Configure the ISP in “NET:<br />

Configuration: Connections: ISP”.<br />

DSL<br />

(PPPoE)<br />

No PPP<br />

No HDLC<br />

No<br />

LAN<br />

No<br />

Yes<br />

Is your IP address<br />

allocated by your<br />

provider?<br />

Yes<br />

Yes<br />

Yes<br />

Dynamic<br />

No<br />

Yes<br />

Enter the IP address and network mask<br />

you w<strong>is</strong>h to obtain from your provider.<br />

IP address<br />

Network mask<br />

Gateway<br />

Your own telephone<br />

number<br />

Max. connection time<br />

per month<br />

Specify the maximum<br />

connection time for one month.<br />

Specify the gateway<br />

for the Internet<br />

connection.<br />

Maximum idle time<br />

Specify the maximum time of inactivity after<br />

which the connection to the ISP <strong>is</strong> cleared down.<br />

Filter l<strong>is</strong>t IN<br />

Filter l<strong>is</strong>t OUT<br />

Select the filter l<strong>is</strong>ts. Filter l<strong>is</strong>ts are created<br />

in “NET Configuration: Safe Access”.<br />

Fin<strong>is</strong>hed<br />

ISP can<strong>no</strong>t be configured.<br />

Flowchart: Configuring the ISP Settings<br />

Configuration Guide<br />

ISP Settings<br />

141


RAS Settings<br />

Have you made the network<br />

settings for the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>?<br />

LAN<br />

No<br />

Configure the RAS access of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. “NET Configuration:<br />

Connections: RAS”<br />

Yes<br />

NET Configuration:<br />

Easy Access<br />

Configure the network settings<br />

for the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

Status<br />

Activate the RAS access.<br />

Telephone number<br />

Specify the telephone number for which<br />

the RAS access should be configured.<br />

Select from PAP,<br />

CHAP and CLID.<br />

Author<strong>is</strong>ation<br />

Number of connections<br />

Specify how many simultaneous<br />

connections are possible via th<strong>is</strong> access.<br />

Select the filter l<strong>is</strong>ts. Filter<br />

l<strong>is</strong>ts are created in “NET<br />

Configuration: Safe Access”<br />

Filter l<strong>is</strong>t IN<br />

Filter l<strong>is</strong>t OUT<br />

Have you created users<br />

with RAS access rights?<br />

Users<br />

No<br />

Yes<br />

User Manager: Users and<br />

User Groups<br />

Configure users that<br />

have RAS access rights.<br />

Add internal telephone<br />

number to the incoming<br />

call d<strong>is</strong>tribution scheme.<br />

Fin<strong>is</strong>hed<br />

Flowchart: Configuring the RAS Settings<br />

142 RAS Settings Configuration Guide


LAN-to-LAN Settings<br />

Have you made the network<br />

settings for the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>?<br />

LAN<br />

No<br />

Yes<br />

NET Configuration:<br />

Easy Access<br />

Configure the network settings<br />

for the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

Configure the LAN-LAN<br />

connection. “NET Configuration:<br />

Connections: LAN-LAN”<br />

Protocol<br />

Telephone number local<br />

IP address local<br />

Network mask local<br />

Select between PPP and HDLC transparent.<br />

Enter the internal telephone number.<br />

Enter the local IP address.<br />

Enter the local network mask.<br />

Yes<br />

CLID<br />

Author<strong>is</strong>ation method of the local<br />

LAN: CLID, PAP or CHAP?<br />

No<br />

User name local<br />

Password local<br />

Specify the user name with which the<br />

remote LAN can access a destination.<br />

Specify the password with which the<br />

remote LAN can access a destination.<br />

Telephone number remote<br />

IP address remote<br />

Network mask remote<br />

Specify the telephone number of the remote LAN access.<br />

Specify the IP address of the remote LAN.<br />

Specify the network mask of the remote LAN.<br />

Yes<br />

CLID<br />

Author<strong>is</strong>ation method of the remote<br />

LAN: CLID, PAP or CHAP?<br />

No<br />

User name remote<br />

Password remote<br />

Specify the user name with which<br />

the remote LAN can be accessed.<br />

Specify the password with which<br />

the remote LAN can be accessed.<br />

Direction of connection<br />

Maximum connection<br />

time per month<br />

Maximum idle time<br />

Add internal telephone<br />

number to the incoming call<br />

d<strong>is</strong>tribution scheme.<br />

Select the direction of the connection.<br />

Specify the maximum number of minutes per month<br />

the connection to the remote LAN can be set up for.<br />

Set the maximum idle time after which a<br />

connection to the remote LAN <strong>is</strong> cleared down.<br />

Fin<strong>is</strong>hed<br />

Flowchart: Configuring the LAN-to-LAN Settings<br />

Configuration Guide<br />

LAN-to-LAN Settings<br />

143


E-mail Function<br />

Have you made the network<br />

settings for the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>?<br />

LAN<br />

No<br />

Yes<br />

Configure the network settings<br />

for the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

NET Configuration:<br />

Easy Access<br />

Do you want to use e-mail<br />

from the Internet?<br />

Internet<br />

Yes<br />

No<br />

Configure your Internet access.<br />

NET Configuration:<br />

Connection: ISP<br />

Has an internal e-mail server<br />

been configured in your LAN?<br />

LAN<br />

No<br />

Yes<br />

No e-mail use<br />

Do you want to be <strong>no</strong>tified of<br />

e-mails on your system telephones?<br />

Notification<br />

No<br />

Yes<br />

Fin<strong>is</strong>hed<br />

Have you stored the<br />

users to be <strong>no</strong>tified?<br />

Users<br />

No<br />

Yes<br />

Create the users and activate<br />

e-mail <strong>no</strong>tification. Also enter<br />

the users' e-mail addresses.<br />

User Manager:<br />

Users, User Groups<br />

and User Accounts<br />

Set the polling time periods.<br />

NET Configuration:<br />

E-Mail Access<br />

Fin<strong>is</strong>hed<br />

Flowchart: Configuring the E-mail Function<br />

144 E-mail Function Configuration Guide


E-mail Access<br />

Do you have access to a mail server<br />

in your network or in the Internet?<br />

Mail server<br />

No<br />

Yes<br />

Configure your network/<br />

Internet access.<br />

NET Configuration: Easy Access<br />

or Configure ISP<br />

Do you have created mail account polls<br />

in the “User Manager: User accounts”?<br />

User accounts<br />

No<br />

Set up user accounts in<br />

the User Manager.<br />

User Manager: User Accounts<br />

Configuration of e-mail<br />

access settings<br />

Yes<br />

Specify the time intervals in which<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> to poll all mail<br />

accounts from the standard POP server.<br />

Maximum number of e-mails<br />

per user account<br />

Enquiry interval<br />

Start and end times:<br />

Monday to Friday 1st starting time<br />

Monday to Friday 1st ending time<br />

Monday to Friday 2nd starting time<br />

Monday to Friday 2nd ending time<br />

Saturday 1st starting time<br />

Saturday 1st ending time<br />

Saturday 2nd starting time<br />

Saturday 2nd ending time<br />

Sunday 1st starting time<br />

Sunday 1st ending time<br />

Sunday 2nd starting time<br />

Sunday 2nd ending time<br />

Specify the maximum <strong>no</strong>. of e-mails per<br />

user account that should be temporarily<br />

stored by the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

Define the time windows in which the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> should check the mail accounts<br />

for new messages in the time intervals that<br />

have been set. You can define two time<br />

windows for each working day (Monday to<br />

Friday), and two each for Saturday and Sunday.<br />

Fin<strong>is</strong>hed<br />

Flowchart: Configuring E-mail Access<br />

Configuration Guide<br />

E-mail Access<br />

145


Frequently Asked Questions<br />

<strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> chapter provides tips and information<br />

on how to deal with any malfunctions<br />

or faults you may experience<br />

with the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

Please <strong>no</strong>te: Repairs to the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> should only be carried<br />

out by qualified personnel.<br />

+3,3 V<br />

LED<br />

-42 V<br />

LED<br />

Activity LED<br />

LAN LED<br />

The following LEDs indicate that the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong> ready for operation:<br />

MPS+1-AC<br />

MPS+1-AC<br />

Position of LEDs on the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

General/Hardware<br />

Question: The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong><br />

<strong>no</strong>t functioning.<br />

Make sure the mains plug <strong>is</strong> properly<br />

connected.<br />

Plug a<strong>no</strong>ther device into the mains<br />

socket to check whether there <strong>is</strong> any<br />

voltage.<br />

Question: The mains plug <strong>is</strong> connected,<br />

the mains socket <strong>is</strong> supplying<br />

output, but the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

still does <strong>no</strong>t function.<br />

DANGER! High voltage inside<br />

the device. To make the system<br />

dead, remove the power plug<br />

from the socket!<br />

Is the +3,3V/-42V LED at the lit up? If<br />

<strong>no</strong>t, contact your service centre or an<br />

author<strong>is</strong>ed dealer. The AC adapter<br />

plug of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> may be<br />

defective.<br />

Question: After restarting the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>, <strong>no</strong>thing <strong>is</strong> indicated<br />

on the d<strong>is</strong>plays of any connected<br />

terminals.<br />

It takes a short while for the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> to start up. After the<br />

restart, check whether the activity<br />

LED flickers in a regularly interval.<br />

<strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> indicates that the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

has started up correctly and <strong>is</strong> ready<br />

for operation. Further information<br />

can be found in the chapter Modules<br />

starting on <strong>page</strong> 52. If the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> has <strong>no</strong>t restarted<br />

146 General/Hardware Frequently Asked Questions


properly, reset the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> to<br />

its original factory setting (refer to<br />

the chapter entitled Resetting the<br />

System Data starting on <strong>page</strong> 84).<br />

Telephony<br />

Question: It <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t possible to<br />

make external calls.<br />

Check the connection between the<br />

NTBA and the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

In the Configurator, check whether<br />

the external S 0 ports are configured<br />

correctly (PBX Configuration: S0<br />

menu).<br />

Question: The <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> <strong>is</strong><br />

connected to an NTBA with a<br />

multi-terminal configuration. Why<br />

<strong>is</strong> it <strong>no</strong>t possible to establ<strong>is</strong>h external<br />

connections?<br />

With the original factory setting, an<br />

additional external S 0 port <strong>is</strong> set for<br />

an NTBA in system configuration;<br />

th<strong>is</strong> additional port will be used first<br />

to seize a trunk line.<br />

Deactivate the corresponding S 0<br />

port in the Configurator (PBX Configuration:<br />

S0 menu).<br />

Question: One of the telephones<br />

<strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t functioning at all.<br />

Make sure the telephone has been<br />

properly connected.<br />

Check also whether the appropriate<br />

port has been configured correctly in<br />

the Configurator (PBX Configuration:<br />

Ports menu).<br />

Question: It <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t possible to<br />

make external calls with one of the<br />

telephones.<br />

Check whether a user <strong>is</strong> configured<br />

for the telephone. Otherw<strong>is</strong>e the<br />

settings of the Guests user group are<br />

<strong>valid</strong> for the telephone. To standard,<br />

th<strong>is</strong> user group has <strong>no</strong> external call<br />

author<strong>is</strong>ation.<br />

Make sure the user configured for<br />

th<strong>is</strong> telephone belongs to a user<br />

group with external line access<br />

(Configurator, User Manager: User<br />

groups menu).<br />

Check also whether the internal call<br />

number of th<strong>is</strong> telephone has been<br />

configured for outgoing call d<strong>is</strong>tribution<br />

(Configurator, PBX Configuration:<br />

Call D<strong>is</strong>tribution menu).<br />

Frequently Asked Questions<br />

Telephony<br />

147


Question: One of the features<br />

(e.g. call diversion) on one of the<br />

telephones can<strong>no</strong>t be used even<br />

though the feature has been configured<br />

in the Configurator of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

Make sure the user configured for<br />

th<strong>is</strong> telephone belongs to a user<br />

group that has access to th<strong>is</strong> feature<br />

(Configurator, User Manager: User<br />

and User groups menus). Some features<br />

can<strong>no</strong>t be used until the system<br />

PIN <strong>is</strong> changed.<br />

Question: Nothing <strong>is</strong> indicated on<br />

the d<strong>is</strong>play of one of the connected<br />

ISDN telephones.<br />

You have connected the ISDN telephone<br />

to an external S 0 port (RJ-45<br />

socket). These ports are intended for<br />

connection to the NTBA only. Connect<br />

the telephone to an internal S 0<br />

port (pressure terminal).<br />

Question: Calls can be made but<br />

<strong>no</strong>t received with one of the ISDN<br />

telephones.<br />

The internal call number that has<br />

been configured for th<strong>is</strong> ISDN telephone<br />

in the Configurator (PBX<br />

Configuration: Ports: S0 menu)<br />

must also be configured as an MSN<br />

on the ISDN telephone itself. For further<br />

information, refer to the User<br />

Guide of your ISDN telephone.<br />

Question: It <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t possible to configure<br />

Call D<strong>is</strong>tribution: Outgoing<br />

for multi-terminal access.<br />

You have configured multi-terminal<br />

access and system access in parallel.<br />

All outgoing calls are therefore establ<strong>is</strong>hed<br />

via system access, and outgoing<br />

call d<strong>is</strong>tribution can be configured<br />

for system access only<br />

(Configurator, Call D<strong>is</strong>tribution:<br />

Outgoing menu).<br />

A specific MSN can be seized for individual<br />

calls by means of a code<br />

number procedure. For further information,<br />

refer to the “<strong>OpenCom</strong> 100,<br />

Operation on Standard Terminals”user<br />

guide.<br />

Question: Which reason may have<br />

problems with receiving faxes<br />

resp. sending faxes?<br />

In frequent cases, the reason may be<br />

found in a problem with the ISDN-L1<br />

reference clock d<strong>is</strong>tribution. The L1<br />

clock <strong>is</strong> delivered from the network<br />

provider. An unclean L1 clock d<strong>is</strong>tribution<br />

and the introduced signalling<br />

jitter <strong>is</strong> overheard by the human ear.<br />

Nevertheless, data and fax transm<strong>is</strong>sions<br />

may be d<strong>is</strong>turbed by the jitter.<br />

Please check, which ISDN lines will<br />

deliver the L1 clock. One of the installed<br />

ISDN interface boards<br />

(MX+S01-8 or MT+S2M1-1) should<br />

show a steady green light with LED<br />

3. Details can be found under L1<br />

Clock starting on <strong>page</strong> 103.<br />

148 Telephony Frequently Asked Questions


DECT<br />

Question: The LED of the RFP 21/<br />

23<strong>is</strong> flashing, but <strong>no</strong>ne of the DECT<br />

devices <strong>is</strong> functioning.<br />

Make sure the terminal setting for<br />

the corresponding U pn port <strong>is</strong> set to<br />

RFP 21/23 (Configurator, PBX Configuration:<br />

Ports: U pn menu).<br />

Question: The LED of the RFP 21/<br />

23 <strong>is</strong> continuously lit up, but one of<br />

the cordless DECT devices <strong>is</strong> indicating<br />

“No connection”.<br />

You have <strong>no</strong>t configured a port for<br />

th<strong>is</strong> DECT device. Configure a port in<br />

the Configurator and start the enrolment<br />

procedure (PBX Configuration:<br />

Ports: DECT-PP menu).<br />

Question: A<strong>no</strong>ther manufacturer’s<br />

DECT device <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t functioning.<br />

Check whether the DECT device supports<br />

the DECT GAP standard. In the<br />

Configurator, also make sure GAP <strong>is</strong><br />

set for th<strong>is</strong> DECT device (PBX Configuration:<br />

Ports: DECT-PP menu).<br />

Question: The startup procedure<br />

of the RFP 21/23 take a long time?<br />

What <strong>is</strong> the reason?<br />

<strong>Th<strong>is</strong></strong> behaviour may indicate a problem<br />

with the reference clock. Refer<br />

also to Which reason may have problems<br />

with receiving faxes resp. sending<br />

faxes? starting on <strong>page</strong> 148.<br />

Question: Is it possible to increase<br />

the time for the enrolment procedure?<br />

You must manually enter the IPEI of<br />

the DECT device in the Configurator.<br />

The enrolment time <strong>is</strong> then increased<br />

to one hour (PBX Configuration:<br />

Ports: DECT-PP menu).<br />

Frequently Asked Questions<br />

DECT<br />

149


LAN<br />

Question: It <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t possible to establ<strong>is</strong>h<br />

a network connection with<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

Check whether the LEDs for the hub<br />

and the PC’s network card are indicating<br />

a connection.<br />

Check the LEDs for the LAN functions<br />

of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. The green LAN<br />

LED at the top indicates whether the<br />

network cable has been properly<br />

connected.<br />

To check whether there <strong>is</strong> a network<br />

connection with your <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>,<br />

enter the “ping IP address” command<br />

in “Run” in the Windows Start<br />

menu (e.g. ping 192.168.99.254).<br />

Question: How can I determine<br />

the IP address of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>?<br />

To find out what the IP address <strong>is</strong>,<br />

enter the code number<br />

*182 on one of the connected<br />

system telephones.<br />

The code-number procedure<br />

*183 also d<strong>is</strong>plays the network<br />

mask.<br />

Question: The network connection<br />

<strong>is</strong> functioning, but <strong>no</strong>thing <strong>is</strong><br />

d<strong>is</strong>played in the browser.<br />

Enter the complete IP address of the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> along with the protocol<br />

identifier, for example http://<br />

192.168.99.254/.<br />

Check whether the browser has<br />

been configured for connection<br />

through a proxy server. If so, deactivate<br />

the “Connect through proxy<br />

server” setting.<br />

Question: You have just configured<br />

the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> via the network.<br />

Why <strong>is</strong> it <strong>no</strong>t possible <strong>no</strong>w to<br />

establ<strong>is</strong>h a remote data transfer<br />

network connection?<br />

The network card and the communication<br />

(remote data transfer)<br />

adapter can<strong>no</strong>t be run with the<br />

same routing setting. Deactivate the<br />

network card before connecting via<br />

the dial-up network.<br />

Question: Our network has grown<br />

over time, with several segments<br />

connected by one central router.<br />

How can PCs from all segments be<br />

connected with the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>?<br />

In the Configurator, use the LAN<br />

setting in ISP to specify the central<br />

router as the default gateway. If necessary,<br />

deactivate any filter rules defined<br />

for the ISP (NET Configuration:<br />

Connections: ISP menu). If<br />

several routers are configured for<br />

your network in different segments,<br />

150 LAN Frequently Asked Questions


you can enter extra static routes in<br />

the NET Configuration: Easy Access:<br />

Routes menu.<br />

Question: In our network the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong> dynamically <strong>is</strong>sues<br />

the IP addresses by DHCP. Can I<br />

firmly assign the IP address for our<br />

internal server PCs (mail, Web)?<br />

You need a static address assignment<br />

for these PCs. Make the appropriate<br />

assignment entries in the<br />

Configurator (NET Configuration:<br />

DHCP menu). Activate “Dynamic and<br />

static address”. If you fix a name for<br />

these IP addresses in the NET Configuration:<br />

Easy Access: Hosts<br />

menu, you can address the server<br />

PCs quite easily by the DNS names.<br />

Internet<br />

Question: I can<strong>no</strong>t access our<br />

company Web site.<br />

Outside your system, your company<br />

Web site <strong>is</strong> accessed at<br />

“www.firm.com”, but in the Configurator<br />

you have entered “firm.com”<br />

as the domain. Your company’s site<br />

URL thus counts as an internal URL<br />

and can only be accessed by entering<br />

the direct IP address. If required,<br />

change the domain setting in the<br />

NET Configuration: Easy Access<br />

menu.<br />

Question: Why do some Internet<br />

services <strong>no</strong>t work even though<br />

they can be used when dialling in<br />

directly via a modem?<br />

Some Internet services require an<br />

active connection coming from the<br />

Internet. But the configured filter<br />

rules prevent th<strong>is</strong>. Plus, it <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t possible<br />

to establ<strong>is</strong>h incoming Internet<br />

connections with the PCs directly<br />

owing to the network address translation<br />

process.<br />

Question: It <strong>is</strong> <strong>no</strong>t possible<br />

to access the Internet with the<br />

OpenPhone 25/27.<br />

The requirement for th<strong>is</strong> <strong>is</strong> that the<br />

set should be configured as Handset+data.<br />

The telephone number<br />

used by the OpenPhone 25/27 to establ<strong>is</strong>h<br />

an Internet connection must<br />

also be specified in the respective<br />

user profile (Configurator, User<br />

Manager: User menu).<br />

With the OpenPhone 25/27, the Internet<br />

can be accessed either directly<br />

via the remote data transfer<br />

network or indirectly via RAS access<br />

on the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. For direct access<br />

you can directly dial any provider.<br />

Indirect access uses the routing<br />

function of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>,<br />

Frequently Asked Questions<br />

Internet<br />

151


accompanied by the configured security<br />

features, for example.<br />

Directly via remote data transfer<br />

network<br />

If the Internet <strong>is</strong> accessed directly via<br />

the remote data transfer network,<br />

make sure that<br />

For information on the installation of<br />

software and on configuring Internet<br />

access, refer to the<br />

“OpenPhone 25” user guide or to the<br />

“OpenPhone 27” user guide.<br />

■<br />

■<br />

the remote data transfer network<br />

<strong>is</strong> properly installed on<br />

your PC and that the correct ISP<br />

access data <strong>is</strong> configured,<br />

the internal number used by the<br />

OpenPhone 25/27 to establ<strong>is</strong>h<br />

the data connection <strong>is</strong> configured<br />

for outgoing call d<strong>is</strong>tribution<br />

(Configurator, PBX Configuration:<br />

Call D<strong>is</strong>tribution:<br />

Outgoing menu).<br />

Indirectly via RAS access<br />

If the Internet <strong>is</strong> accessed indirectly<br />

via RAS, the system admin<strong>is</strong>trator<br />

should make sure that:<br />

■<br />

■<br />

■<br />

perm<strong>is</strong>sion has been given for<br />

Internet access via RAS (Configurator,<br />

Net Configuration: Safe<br />

Access menu),<br />

an internal number <strong>is</strong> configured<br />

for RAS access (Configurator,<br />

Net Configuration: Connections:<br />

RAS menu),<br />

your user group has been<br />

granted RAS access rights (Configurator,<br />

User Manager: User<br />

Groups menu).<br />

152 Internet Frequently Asked Questions


Technical Data<br />

Please observe the technical information<br />

regarding modules under<br />

Modules starting on <strong>page</strong> 52.<br />

Component<br />

1-12 frame of the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong><br />

– BPV+1-12 backplane system: Supply voltages and system signals for up<br />

to 2 power supply units, 1 central control<br />

module and 12 interface cards<br />

– Dimensions: 4.5 height units (1 U = 44.45 mm)<br />

19" frame in accordance with DIN 41494<br />

Part 5 for installation in a 19" cabinet<br />

– Number of slots: 12 22<br />

Cascading of two 19" frames<br />

– Length of cable: 50 cm; 1:1 network cable connecting master<br />

and slave<br />

– Number of channels: 236 –<br />

Modules<br />

– MPS+1-AC power supply unit (with AC/DC converter) 55<br />

– MC+1-3 central control module 57<br />

– MT+S2M1-1 trunk module 60<br />

– MX+S01-8 subscriber or trunk module 63<br />

– MS+UPN1-8 subscriber module 65<br />

– MS+UPN2-8 subscriber module 66<br />

– MS+A1-8 subscriber module 68<br />

Page<br />

28<br />

–<br />

98<br />

Technical Data<br />

153


The following table provides an<br />

overview of the configuration limits<br />

for the <strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>. These limits<br />

result from the combination of different<br />

interface cards.<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>: system configuration limits<br />

maximum number of ports<br />

…via module …<br />

2 (1 x Ethernet, 1 x V.24) MC+1-3<br />

4 x S 2M MT+S2M1-1<br />

24 x S 0 (for internal or external use) MX+S01-8<br />

24 x U pn MS+UPN1-8<br />

24 x U pn MS+UPN2-8<br />

24 x a/b MS+A1-8<br />

System configuration limits in general<br />

2 Frames<br />

1 CompactFlash card<br />

Note: The online help provides an<br />

overview of the limits that should be<br />

observed when configuring the<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> <strong>510</strong>.<br />

154 Technical Data


Index<br />

Numerics<br />

1-12 frame 15, 21<br />

19" frame 15, 21<br />

A<br />

a/b adapter 46<br />

a/b ports 40<br />

Accessories 48<br />

Actor<br />

See Intercom system 42<br />

Adapter<br />

Audio 46<br />

Cables (RS-232 - RJ-45) 16<br />

Upn 46<br />

Add-on 49<br />

Author<strong>is</strong>ations 10<br />

B<br />

Backplane 15<br />

Exchanging 28<br />

Basic setting 84<br />

Bundles 105<br />

Busy key 111<br />

C<br />

Call keys 110<br />

Clock 133<br />

Synchron<strong>is</strong>ing the PC (via<br />

SNTP) 133<br />

COM port 44<br />

Configuration 70<br />

Client 77<br />

Configuration with Windows 73<br />

Establ<strong>is</strong>hing a network<br />

connection 76<br />

Initial configuration 70<br />

Installing the remote data transfer<br />

network under Windows 9x 75<br />

Loading software updates 84<br />

Network card setup 75<br />

Preconfiguration 82<br />

RAS service 75<br />

Remote configuration 82<br />

Resetting the system data 84<br />

Saving and loading the<br />

configuration 84<br />

Serial port (V.24) 75<br />

Starting the browser 77<br />

System prerequ<strong>is</strong>ites 71<br />

V.24 port 75<br />

Configuration examples 86<br />

Introduction to TCP/IP 87<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> 100 in a LAN with an IPenabled<br />

server 91<br />

<strong>OpenCom</strong> 100 in a serverless<br />

LAN 88<br />

RAS 90<br />

Configuration guide<br />

Easy Access 140<br />

E-mail access 145<br />

E-mail function 144<br />

ISP settings 141<br />

LAN-to-LAN settings 143<br />

Overview 138<br />

PBX ports 139<br />

RAS settings 142<br />

Configuring<br />

Preparation 79<br />

Starting the Web console 79<br />

Control module 5, 15<br />

Functional description 57<br />

Installation 23<br />

D<br />

DECT 8, 149<br />

DHCP 86<br />

Index<br />

155


Direct call key 111<br />

DNS 89, 91<br />

DSL 43<br />

DSS1 103<br />

E<br />

E-mail 8<br />

F<br />

Factory settings 10<br />

FAQs 146<br />

Features 5<br />

Internet factory settings 13<br />

Telephony factory settings 10<br />

H<br />

Hardware 146<br />

I<br />

Installation 15, 17<br />

Control module 23<br />

Installation in a 19" rack 21<br />

Interfaces 25<br />

Power supply units 27<br />

Scope of delivery 16<br />

Siting 20<br />

Intercom system 41<br />

Interface cards 5, 15<br />

Installation 25<br />

Interfaces<br />

a/b 40<br />

LAN 43<br />

MS+A1-8 68<br />

MS+UPN1-8 65<br />

MS+UPN2-8 66<br />

MX+S01-8 63<br />

Overview 33<br />

PCM 43, 98<br />

S0 34, 37<br />

S2M 60<br />

Upn 38<br />

V.24 6<br />

Internet<br />

Access 7<br />

Factory settings 13<br />

Internet access 95<br />

Costs 95<br />

E-mail 96<br />

NAT 96<br />

Web 95<br />

ISDN-L1 clock 101<br />

L<br />

LAN port 43<br />

LCR 106<br />

LDAP 134<br />

Linux 77<br />

Log-in procedure 132<br />

M<br />

MacOS 77<br />

MC+1-3 43, 98<br />

see Control module 57<br />

MPS+1-AC<br />

see Power supply units 55<br />

MS+A1-8 68<br />

MS+S2M1-1 101, 104<br />

MS+UPN1-8 65, 100<br />

MS+UPN2-8 66, 100<br />

MT+S2M1-1 60<br />

Multi-terminal access 5, 102<br />

Music on Hold 41<br />

External devices 41<br />

Generating own files 85<br />

MX+S01-8 63<br />

N<br />

NET CAPI 130<br />

NTBA 43, 147<br />

Nummerierung 107<br />

156 Index


O<br />

Online help 81<br />

OpenCTI 132<br />

Outlook Express 134<br />

P<br />

PBX cascade 84<br />

PBX cascading 98<br />

PBX networking 102<br />

PBX number 107<br />

PC status d<strong>is</strong>play 131<br />

PCM port 43<br />

Pin assignment<br />

a/b interface 42<br />

Audio adapter 47<br />

IAE 36<br />

MT+S2M1-1 61<br />

S0 interfaces 34<br />

Upn interface 39, 65<br />

V.24 interface 44<br />

Point-to-point connections 104<br />

Ports<br />

See Interfaces 33<br />

Power failure 31<br />

Power supply units 5, 15<br />

Functional description 55<br />

Installation 27<br />

Q<br />

Q.SIG 103<br />

R<br />

Remote configuration 82<br />

Resetting system data 84<br />

Routes 106<br />

S<br />

S0 port 148<br />

S0 ports 34<br />

S0 ports, internal 37<br />

S2M 103<br />

Safety 17<br />

Saving and loading the<br />

configuration 84<br />

Sensor<br />

See Intercom system 42<br />

Slots 22<br />

SNTP 133<br />

Software updates, loading 84<br />

System access 5, 102<br />

System data, resetting 84<br />

Systray d<strong>is</strong>play 131<br />

T<br />

Team functions<br />

Explanation of keys 110<br />

Introduction 110<br />

Team key 111<br />

Telephony 147<br />

Telephony factory settings 10<br />

Terminals<br />

Overview 33<br />

Three-member team 113<br />

Time<br />

After a power failure 31<br />

Time zone 133<br />

Toggle team 115<br />

Troubleshooting 146<br />

Trunk key 110<br />

U<br />

Unified team 114<br />

Upn ports 38<br />

V<br />

Voice Mail 41<br />

Index<br />

157


Notes<br />

158 Index


Notes<br />

Index<br />

159


Notes<br />

160 Index


In the UK:<br />

DeTeWe Ltd<br />

1 Frogmore Road, Hemel Hempstead,<br />

Herts, HP3 9TG<br />

WWW: http://www.detewe.co.uk/<br />

Other countries:<br />

DeTeWe AG & Co.<br />

Zeughofstrasse 1, D-10997 Berlin,<br />

Germany<br />

WWW: http://www.detewe.de/<br />

Subject to changes<br />

As of 06.2004

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!